Pioneer SUPERTUNER 3 AVH-P5100DVD Operation Manual
Operation Manual D VD A V RECEIVER A VH-P5100D VD English <CRB2972-A/N> <1>
Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER product. Please read through this manual before usi ng the product for the firs t time, to en- sure proper use. After reading, please k eep the manual in a safe and accessible place for futur e reference . Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 9 ! DVD video disc region numbers 9 ! When an operation is prohibited 14 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 6 T o ensure safe driving 6 â P arking brake interlock 7 â When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT 7 â When using a rear view camera 7 T o avoid batter y exhaustion 7 Before Y ou Start Information to User 8 F or Canadian model 8 About this unit 8 â Playable discs 9 â DVD video disc region numbers 9 About this manual 10 After-sales ser vice for P ioneer products 10 Visit our website 10 F eatures 11 â About WMA 12 â About MP3 12 â About AAC 12 â About DivX 13 â About the SA T RADIO READY mark 13 T o protect the LCD screen 13 F or viewing the LCD comfortably 13 â Changing the wide screen size 13 â Changing the picture adjustment 14 What the marks on DVDs indicate 14 â When an operation is prohibited 14 P rotecting your unit from theft 14 â Removing the front panel 14 â Attaching the front panel 14 Resetting the micropro cessor 15 F eature demo mode 15 Operating this unit What âÂÂs what 16 â Head unit 16 â Optional remote control 16 Basic Operations 17 â P ower ON/OFF 17 â Selecting a source 17 â Adjusting the volume 18 â T ouch panel key basic operation 18 â Opening and closing the LCD panel 19 Radio 20 â Basic Operations 20 â Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 21 â Introduction to advanced operations 21 â Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 21 â T uning in strong signals 21 Built-in DVD player 22 â Basic Operations 22 â Basic playback controls 23 â Switching the media file type 23 â Operating the DVD menu 23 â PBC playback 24 â Playing DivXî VOD content 24 â Skipping back or for ward to another title 24 â CM skip/CM back 25 â Resume playback (Bookma rk) 25 â Searching for the part you want to play 25 â Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 26 â Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 26 â Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 26 Contents En 2
â F rame-by-frame playback 27 â Slow motion playback 27 â Return to the specified scene 27 â Automatic playback of DVDs 27 â T ext information 27 â Selecting tracks from the track list 28 â Selecting files from the file name list 28 â Introduction to advanced operations 28 â Repeating play 28 â Playing tracks in random order 29 â Scanning tracks or folders 29 â Selecting audio output 29 â Using compression 30 Playing songs on iP od 30 â Basic Operations 30 â Playing video 31 â Browsing for a song/video 31 â Displaying text information on iP od 32 â Repeating play 32 â Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) 32 â Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle all) 32 â Operating this unitâ s iP od function from your iP od 32 â P ausing a song 33 â Selecting songs from album list of currently playing artist 33 â Changing audiobook speed 33 Playing songs on USB portable audio player/ USB memory 33 â Basic Operations 33 â P ausing compressed audio playback 34 â Introduction to advanced operations 34 â Displaying text information of an audio file 34 â Selecting files from the file name list 34 Audio Adjustments 35 â Introduction of audio adjustments 35 â Using balance adjustment 35 â Using the equalizer 35 â Adjusting loudness 36 â Using subwoofer output 36 â Boosting the bass 37 â Using the high pass filter 37 â Adjusting source levels 37 Setting up the DVD player 38 â Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 38 â Setting the subtitle language 38 â Setting the audio language 38 â Setting the menu language 39 â Switching the assist subtitle on or off 39 â Setting the angle icon display 39 â Setting the aspect ratio 39 â Setting the parental lock 40 â Setting the DivX subtitle file 41 â Displaying your DivXî VOD registration code 41 â Setting for digital output 41 Initial Settings 42 â Adjusting initial settings 42 â Switching the auxiliar y setting 42 â Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 42 â Changing languages for CAUTION 43 â Switching the sound muting/ attenuation 43 â Switching the warning tone 43 â Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 43 â Correcting distorted sound 44 â Resetting the audio functions 44 Other F unctions 45 En 3 Contents
â Introduction of system adjustments 45 â Changing the wide screen mode 45 â Changing the picture adjustment 45 â Selecting the background display 46 â Setting the AV input 46 â Setting the clock 47 â Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) 47 â Adjusting the LCD panel slide position 47 â Setting the automatic open function 48 â Switching the iP od charge setting 48 â Selecting the OSD color 48 â Selecting the illumination color 48 â Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 49 â Using the AUX source 49 â Using the external unit 50 â Using the PGM button 51 Available accessories XM tuner 52 â Basic Operations 52 â Storing and recalling broadcast stations 52 â Switching the XM channel select mode 53 â Selecting an XM channel directly 53 â Using the MyMix function 53 â Displaying the Radio ID 54 â Switching the XM display 55 SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner 55 â Basic Operations 55 â Storing and recalling broadcast stations 56 â Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode 56 â Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly 57 â Using the MyMix function 57 â Using the Game Alert function 58 â Displaying the Radio ID 59 â Switching the SIRIUS display 59 â Using Instant Replay function 59 Bluetooth Audio 60 â Basic Operations 60 â P ausing playback 61 â Introduction to advanced operations 61 â Connecting a Bluetooth audio player 61 â Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player 61 â Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 61 Bluetooth T elephone 62 â Basic Operations 62 â Setting up for hands-free phoning 63 â Making a phone call 63 â T aking a phone call 63 â Introduction to advanced operations 64 â Connecting a cellular phone 64 â Disconnecting a cellular phone 64 â Registering a connected cellular phone 65 â Deleting a registered phone 65 â Connecting to a registered cellular phone 65 â Using the phone book 65 â Using the call histor y 67 â Using preset numbers 67 â Making a call by entering phone number 68 â Clearing memory 68 â Setting automatic answering 68 â Setting automatic rejecting 68 â Switching the ring tone 68 â Echo canceling and noise reduction 69 Contents En 4
â Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 69 Multi-CD Player 69 â Basic Operations 69 â Selecting a disc 70 â P ausing CD playback 70 â Introduction to advanced operations 70 â Using CD TEXT functions 70 DVD Player 71 â Basic Operations 71 â Selecting a disc 71 â Selecting a folder 71 â P ausing disc playback 71 â Introduction to advanced operations 72 TV tuner 73 â Basic Operations 73 â Storing and recalling broadcast stations 73 â Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 74 Digital Signal P rocessor 74 â Introduction of DSP adjustments 74 â Using the sound field control 75 â Using the position selector 75 â Using balance adjustment 76 â Adjusting source levels 76 â Using the dynamic range control 76 â Using the down-mix function 77 â Using the direct control 77 â Using the Dolby P ro Logic II 77 â Setting the speaker setting 78 â Adjusting the speaker output levels 79 â Selecting a cross-over frequency 79 â Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 79 â Using the time alignment 80 â Using the equalizer 81 â Using the auto-equalizer 82 â Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 82 Additional Infor mation T roubleshooting 85 Error messages 87 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 89 Handling guideline of discs and player 90 DVD discs 90 DVD-R/DVD-RW discs 90 AVCHD recorded discs 90 CD-R/CD-RW discs 90 Dual Discs 91 Compressed audio files on the disc 91 â Example of a hierarchy 91 â Compressed audio compatibility 92 USB audio player/USB memor y 92 â USB audio player/USB memor y compatibility 92 â USB audio player/USB memor y 92 â Compressed audio compatibility 93 DivX video files 94 â DivX compatibility 94 About handling the iP od 94 â About iP od settings 94 Using the display correctly 94 â Handling the display 95 â Liquid cr ystal display (LCD) screen 95 â Keeping the display in good condition 95 â Small fluorescent tube 95 Language code chart for DVD 97 T erms 98 Specifications 101 Index 103 En 5 Contents
IMPORT ANT SA FEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully be- fore operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy as a refer ence for operating procedur es and safety informa- tion. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understoo d the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs oper- ating systems or safety features, includ- ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely oper- ate the vehicle. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experi- ence difficulty in operating the system or reading the display , park your vehicle in a safe location and make necessary adjust- ments. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 9 T o promote safety , certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on, and the vehicle is not in motion. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself . Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. T o ensure safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWIT CH. IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of damage and injur y and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also , rear displays should not be in a location where they are visibly distracting to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. When you attempt to watch a DVD, Video CD or TV while driving, the warning Viewing of front seat video sour ce while driving is strictly prohibited. will appear on the front display . Precautions En 6 Section 01
T o watch a DVD, Video CD or TV on the front display , park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. Parking brake interlock Certain functions (DVD/TV viewing and certain touch panel keys) offered by this unit could be dangerous and/or unlawful if used while driv- ing. T o prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in motion, there is an interlock system that senses when the parking brake is set. If you attempt to use the functions described above while driving, they will be- come disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and (1) apply the parking brake, (2) release the parking brake, and then (3) apply the parking brake again. Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake. When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT This unit âÂÂs REAR MONITOR OUTPUT is for connection of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or TV . WARNING NEVER install the rear display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. When using a rear view camera With an optional rear view camera, you are able to use this unit as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight parking spot. WARNING ! SCREEN IMAGE MA Y APPEAR RE- VERSED. ! USE INPUT ONL Y FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE MA Y RESUL T IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. CAUTION ! The rear view camera function is to be used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur- poses. ! Please note that the edges of the rear view camera images may differ slightly according to whether full screen images are displayed when backing up, and whether the images are used for checking the rear when the vehicle is moving forward. T o avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. Using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. ! When no power is supplied to this unit be- cause of a replacement of the vehicle bat- ter y or for some similar reason, the microcomputer of this unit is returned to its initial condition. W e recommend that you transcribe the audio adjustment data. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. Precautions En 7 Section 01 Precautions
Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. For Canadian model This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. About this unit The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo- cated for use in North America. Use in other areas may result in poor reception. WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords asso- ciated with accessories sold with the product may expose you to chemicals listed on proposi- tion 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. W ash hands after handling . Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
CA UTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES O THER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CA UTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD . CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, damage to this unit, smoke, and over- heating could result from contact with liquids. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. Important (Serial number) The serial number is located on the bottom of this unit. F or your own security and convenience, be sure to record this number on the enclosed warranty card. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation . ! This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc r egion numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit and in this manual (refer to Specifications on page 101). Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit âÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. After -sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from where you purchased this unit for after-sales ser vice (including warranty conditions) or any other informatio n. In case the necessar y infor- mation is not available, please contact the companies listed below: Please do not ship your unit to the companies at the addresses listed below for repair without advance contact. U.S.A. P ioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P .O . Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760 800-421-1404 CANADA P ioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. CUSTOMER SA TISF ACTION DEP ARTMENT 300 Allstate P arkway Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 F or warranty information please see the Lim- ited Warranty sheet included with this unit. Visit our website Visit us at the following site: http://www .pioneerelectronics.com 1 Register your product. W e will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft. 2 Receive updates on the latest products and technologies. 3 Download owner âÂÂs manuals, order product catalogues, research new products, and much more. 4 Y our feedback is important in our continual ef- fort to design and build the most advanced, consumer-focused product in the industr y . Serial number Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
Features T ouch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key . DVD-R/RW compatibility It is possible to play back DVD-R/RW discs re- corded with the video format. (Refer to DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs on page 90.) Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). WMA, MP3 and AAC compatibility Refer to Compressed audio compatibility on page 92. DivX î video compatibility Refer to DivX compatibility on page 94. Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility When using this unit with a P ioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo - sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel re- cordings. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories . Dolby , Pro Logic, and the dou- ble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories . ! Manufactured under license under U.S. P a- tent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and world- wide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trade- marks of DTS, Inc. é 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reser ved. Portable audio player compatibility ! Make inquiries to the manufacturer about your USB portable audio player/USB mem- or y . This unit corresponds to the following. â USB MSC (Mass Storage Class) compliant portable audio player and memory â WMA, MP3, AAC and W AV file playback F or details about the compatibility , refer to Compressed audio compatibility on page 93. iPhone iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. iT unes iT unes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPod iP od is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Before Y ou Start En 11 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
iPod compatibility This unit can control and listen to songs on an iP od. ! This unit supports only the following iP ods. Supported iP od sof tware versions are shown below . Older versions of iP od soft- ware may not be supported. â iP od third generation (sof tware version 2.3.0) â iP od fourth generation (sof tware version 3.1.1) â iP od photo (software version 1.2.1) â iP od fifth generation (software version 1.3.0) â iP od mini (sof tware version 1.4.1) â iP od nano first generation (software ver- sion 1.3.1) â iP od nano second generation (software version 1.1.3) â iP od nano third generation (software version 1.1.3) â iP od classic (software version 1.1.2) â iP od touch (software version 2.0) ! Music files on iP od touch can be played back. â iPhone (software version 2.0) ! When using an iP od, Inter face Cable for iP od (e.g., CD -IU205V) is required. ! Operations may var y depending on the soft- ware version of iP od. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation , and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation . Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA The Wi ndows Media ⢠logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. ! Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. ! This unit may not operate correctly depend- ing on the application used to encode WMA files. ! This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing , Inc. About MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad- casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/ or other networks or in other electronic con- tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An indepen- dent license for such use is required. F or de- tails, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. About AAC This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iT unes. Before Y ou Start En 12 Section 02
About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format cre- ated by the DivX î video codec from DivX, Inc. This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitles âÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD -R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabeti- cal order . Official DivX î Certified product Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files ! DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. About the SA T RADIO READY mark The SA T RADIO READY mark indicates that the Satellite Radio T uner for P ioneer (i.e., XM tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold separately) can be controlled by this unit. Please inquire to your dealer or nearest authorized P ioneer ser vice station regarding the satellite radio tuner that can be connected to this unit. F or satellite radio tuner operation, please refer to the satellite radio tuner owner âÂÂs manual. ! The system will use direct satellite-to -recei- ver broadcasting technology to provide lis- teners in their cars and at home with cr ystal-clear sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satellite radio will create and package over 100 channels of digital-quality music, news, sports, talk and children âÂÂs programming. ! â SA T Radio âÂÂ, the SA T Radio logo and all re- lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satel- lite Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc. T o protect the LCD screen ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! When using a cellular phone, keep the an- tenna of the cellular phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. ! Never touch the screen with anything be- sides your finger when operating the touch panel function. The screen can scratch easily . For viewing the LCD comfortably Due to its construction, the viewing angle of the screen size is limited. Y ou can adjust it by changing either screen size or picture adjust- ment. Changing the wide scr een size By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9, you can adjust the screen so that the screen can fit to the video image you are playing. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 45. Before Y ou Start En 13 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can make the best adjustment to the pic- ture display by the BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, COLOR and HUE . Y ou can also dim or bright- en the overall picture the DIMMER. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the pictur e adjustment on page 45. What the mark s on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the numbe r of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the numbe r of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the numbe r of viewing an- gles. 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to -height ratio) type. 1 ALL Indicates the numbe r of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached to deter theft. ! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within four seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. ! Y ou can turn off the warning tone. Refer to Switching the warning tone on page 43. Important ! Handle gently when removing or attaching the front panel. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shock. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. ! If removed, replace the front panel on the unit before starting up your vehicle. Removing the front panel 1 Press DET ACH to release the front panel. 2 Grab the front panel and remove. T ake care not to grip it too tightly or to drop the front panel and protect it from contact with water or other fluids to prevent perma- nent damage. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by clipping it into place. Before Y ou Start En 14 Section 02
Resetting the microprocessor P ressing RESET lets you reset the micropro - cessor to its initial settings without changing the bookmark information. The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! P rior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button Note After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factor y) settings, switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET . Feature demo mode The feature demo automatically starts when you select the source OFF. The demo con- tinues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. T o cancel the feature demo, press and hold VOLUME/MUTE. T o restart the feature demo, press and hold VOLUME/MUTE again. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off , it may drain batter y power . Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle batter y may be drained. Before Y ou Start En 15 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
What â s what Head unit 1 VOLUME/MUTE button Rotate it to increase or decrease the vo - lume. P ress to cut the sound. 2 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play. 3 EJECT ( h) button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. 4 EQ button P ress to select various equalizer cur ves. 5 OPEN/CLOSE button P ress to open or close the LCD panel. P ress and hold to turn the LCD panel hori- zontal temporarily from upright position. 6 SRC button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. 7 c /d (TRACK) buttons P ress to do manual seek tuning, fast for- ward, reverse and track search controls. 8 RESET button P ress to return to the factor y settings (initial settings). 9 DET ACH button P ress to remove the front panel from the head unit. Optional remote control The remote control CD-R55 is sold separately . F or details concerning operations, see the re- mote control manual. Operating this unit En 16 Section 03
Basic Operations Power ON/OFF 1 Source icon T urning the unit on % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. % When using the button, press SRC to turn the unit on. T urning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch OFF. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. % When using the button, press SRC and hold until the unit turns off. Selecting a source Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. T o switch to the DVD player , load a disc in the unit. T o switch to the iP od, connect an iP od to this unit. % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! RADIO â Radio ! iPod â iP od ! USB â USB portable audio player/USB memor y ! TEL â Bluetooth telephone ! BT -Audio â Bluetooth audio player ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! MCD â Multi-CD player ! AUX 1 â AU X 1 ! AUX 2 â AU X 2 ! AV â AV input ! TV â T elevision ! EXT 1 â External unit 1 ! EXT 2 â External unit 2 ! XM â XM tuner ! SIRIUS â SIRIUS tuner ! REARVIEW â Rear view camera ! OFF â T urn the unit off # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # While operating the menu, you cannot select a source by touching the source icon. # T o close source select menu, touch ESC. # When connecting an iP od, you cannot select a USB source to this unit. % When using the button, press SRC re- peatedly to select a desired source. Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change. â When no unit corresponding to the se- lected source is connected. â When there is no disc or magazine in the player . â When AUX (auxiliar y input) is set to off (refer to page 42). â When the AV (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 46). ! AUX1 is set to VIDEO by default. Set the AUX1 to OFF when not in use (refer to Switching the auxiliar y setting on page 42). ! REARVIEW (rear view camera) cannot be se- lected by pressing SRC . Operating this unit En 17 Section 03 Operating this unit
! Image from rear view camera can be dis- played automatically when the appropriate setting is conducted. F or details, refer to Set- ting for rear view camera (back up camera) on page 47. ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as ones available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions with this unit. T wo external units can be controlled with this unit. When two external units are connected, the external unit is automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2 by this unit. ! When this unit âÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the vehicle âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicle âÂÂs antenna extends when this unit âÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the antenna, turn the source off . Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME/MUTE to adjust the sound level. Rotate VOLUME/MUTE to increa se or de- crease the volume. T ouch panel key basic operat ion Activating the touch panel keys 1 A V MENU key T ouch to display MENU. 2 TIL T ( / ) keys T ouch to adjust the LCD panel angle. 3 T ouch panel keys T ouch to do various operations. 1 T ouch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. The touch panel keys appear on the display . # T o go to the next group of touch panel keys, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of touch panel keys, touch PREV . 2 T ouch HIDE to hide the touch panel keys. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when selecting video sources. Operating the menu 1 FUNCTION MENU key T ouch to select functions for each source. 2 AUDIO MENU key T ouch to select various sound quality controls. 3 SYSTEM MENU key T ouch to select various setup functions. 4 ESC key T ouch to cancel the control mode of func- tions. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display MENU. The menu names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When A V MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. Operating this unit En 18 Section 03
2 T ouch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. Opening and closing the LCD panel The LCD panel will be opened or closed auto- matically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off . Y ou can turn off the automatic close/open function. (Refer to page 48.) ! Do not close the LCD panel with hands by force. That cause malfunction. ! The automatic close/open function will op- erate the display as follows. â When the ignition switch is turned OFF while the LCD panel is opened, the LCD panel will close after six seconds. â When the ignition switch is turned ON again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel will be opened automatically . â Removing or attaching the front panel will automatically close or open the LCD panel. (Refer to page 14.) ! When the ignition switch is turned OFF after the LCD panel has been closed, turn- ing the ignition switch ON again (or turning it to ACC) will not open the LCD panel. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. ! When closing the LCD panel, check to make sure that it has closed completely . If the LCD panel has stopped halfwa y , leaving it like this could result in damage. CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be especially cautious of children âÂÂs hands and fin- gers. % Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. # T o close the LCD panel, press OPEN/CLOSE again. Adjusting the LCD panel angle Important ! If you can hear the LCD panel knocking against your vehicle âÂÂs console or dashboard, touch TIL T ( ) to move the LCD panel a little forward. ! When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be sure to touch TIL T ( / ). F orcibly adjusting the LCD panel by hand may damage it. % T ouch TIL T ( / ) to adjust the LCD panel to an easily viewable angle. The LCD panel angle continues changing as long as you touch TIL T ( / ) and hold. # The adjusted LCD panel angle will be memor- ized and automatically returned to the next time the LCD panel is opened. T urning the LCD panel horizontal When the LCD panel is upright and it hinders the operation of the air conditioner , the panel can be turned horizontal temporarily . Operating this unit En 19 Section 03 Operating this unit
% Press and hold OPEN/CLOSE to tur n the LCD panel horizontal. # T o return to original position, press and hold OPEN/CLOSE again. # The LCD panel returns to the original position automatically with beeping sound 10 seconds after operation. Radio Basic Operations 1 Source icon 2 Band indicator 3 P reset number indicator 4 F requency indicator 5 LOCAL indicator Appears when local seek tuning is on. 6 5 (stereo) indicator Appears when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch RADIO to select the radio. 2 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND until the desired band ( FM1, FM2 , FM3 for FM or AM) is displayed. 3 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by press- ing c or d ( TRACK). 4 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip sta- tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the key . # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Operating this unit En 20 Section 03
Note Listening AM radio while an iP od is charged from this unit may generate noise. In this case, turn the iP od charge setting off and noise is disap- peared. (Refer to Switching the iP od charge setting on page 48.) Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies Y ou can easily store up to six broadcast fre- quencies for later recall. ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memor y . 1 T ouch LIST to display the preset list. 2 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the beep sounds. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y. 3 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 . Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the frequency display . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning keys P1 to P6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key . ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 to P6 . % T ouch BSM on the function menu to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSM again. T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. % T ouch LOCAL on the function menu to set the sensitivity . T ouch LOCAL repeatedly until the desired level of sensitivity appears in the display . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: OFF âÂÂLEVEL1 âÂÂLEVEL2 âÂÂLEVEL3 â LEVEL4 AM: OFF â LEVEL1 â LEVEL2 The LEVEL4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Operating this unit En 21 Section 03 Operating this unit
Built-in DVD player Basic Operations 1 Source icon 2 Media indicator Shows the type of disc currently playing. 3 Title/F older number indicator DVD: shows the title currently playing. Compressed audio and DivX: shows the folder currently playing. 4 Chapter/track/file number indicator DVD: shows the chapter currently playing. Video CD and CD: shows the track currently playing. Compressed audio and DivX: shows the file currently playing. 5 Play time indicator 6 V ariable message area DVD video: shows the subtitle language, audio language and viewing angle. CD TEXT , compressed audio and DivX: shows the text information of currently playing disc. 1 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. Playback will automatically start. # Be sure to turn up the label side of a disc. # After a disc has been inserted, use touch panel keys to select the DVD player . # When the automatic playback function is on, this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati- cally start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to A utomatic playback of DVDs on page 27. # With some DVD discs, a menu may be dis- played. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page.) # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. (Refer to PBC playback on page 24.) # T o eject a disc, press h (eject). 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 When playing a compressed audio or DivX, touch a or b to select a folder . # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. is displayed only when the list is operated. 4 T o skip back or forward to another chapter/track, briefly touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another chapter/track by pressing c or d ( TRACK). # During PBC playback, a menu may be dis- played if you per form these operations. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. When DVD, DivX disc or Video CD is playing, if you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you release o or p .T o resume playback at a desired point, touch de . # When playing DVD video or Video CD, fast for- ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this happens, normal playback automatically resumes. Notes ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when displaying video image. ! Read the precautions for the player and discs in the following section. Refer to Handling guideline of discs and player on page 90. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02-XX is displayed, refer to Error messages on page 87. Operating this unit En 22 Section 03
! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. F or more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 25. ! If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play . Refer to Switching the media file type on this page. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FORMA T READ is dis- played. ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! When playing back WMA files, album title list does not appear . ! If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls for playing discs. The following chapters cover other playback features in more details. Key What it does de Starts playback, pauses a disc that â s playing or restarts a paused disc. g Stops playback. o Skips to the start of the current track, chapte r or file, then to previous tracks/chapters/files. ! P er forms fast reverse by touching and holding o . p Skips to the next track, chapter or file. ! P er forms fast forward by touching and holding p . Note Y ou may find with some DVD or Video CD discs that some playback controls do not work in cer- tain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play. ! This unit allows playback of the following media file type recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. â Audio data (CD -DA) â Compressed audio files (WMA/MP3/ AAC) â DivX video files ! In case of DVD-R/RW/ROM, this unit does not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA). % T ouch MEDIA to switch between media file types. T ouch MEDIA repeatedly to switch between the following media file types: CD (audio data (CD-DA)) âÂÂWMA/MP3/AAC (compressed audio) â DivX (DivX video files) Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using a menu. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! Y ou can display the menu by touching MENU or TOP MENU while a disc is play- ing. T ouching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location se- lected from the menu. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. Using DVD menu direct touch control This function allows you to operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item directly . % T ouch the desired menu item on the DVD menu directly . # Depending on the contents of DVD discs, this function may not work properly . In this case, using touch panel keys operate the DVD menu. Operating this unit En 23 Section 03 Operating this unit
Using the touch panel keys 1 T ouch to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # T o switch to the DVD menu direct touch con- trol, touch TOUCH . 2 T ouch a , b, c or d to select the desired menu item. 3 T ouch ENTER. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. PBC playback During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. Y ou can operate PBC menu with 10Key. ! This function is available for Video CD. 1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch SEARCH and then touch 10Key. # Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. 2 T ouch 0 to 9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch ENTER to start playback. Playback starts from the selected menu item. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Notes ! Y ou can display the menu by touching RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. ! PBC playback of Video CD cannot be can- celed. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON , search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play . Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), Rental Expired. is dis- played. ! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim- ited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the con- tent as of ten as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . About your regis- tration code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code on page 41. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di- gital Rights Management) system. This re- stricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. % If the message is displayed after load- ing a disc containing DivX VOD content, touch PLA Y. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. # T o skip to the next file, touch NEXT PLA Y . # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con- tent, touch STOP . Skipping back or forwar d to another title ! This function is available for DVD. Operating this unit En 24 Section 03
% T o skip back or forward to another title, touch a or b. T ouching a skips to the start of the next title. T ouching b skips to the start of the previous title. Title numbers are displayed for eight seconds. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . CM skip/CM back This function skips a reproduced image for a specified time. If the currently playing disc contains commercials, it is possible to skip them. ! This function is available for DVD. % T o skip progr essively backward or for - ward, touch or . Each time you touch or it changes steps in the following order: CM back 5 sec. â 15 sec. âÂÂ30 sec. âÂÂ1.0 min. âÂÂ2.0 min. âÂÂ3.0 min. âÂÂ0 sec. CM skip 30 sec. âÂÂ1.0 min. âÂÂ1.5 min. âÂÂ2.0 min. âÂÂ3.0 min. âÂÂ5.0 min. âÂÂ10.0 min. âÂÂ0 sec. Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. ! This function is available for DVD video. % During playback, touch BOOKMARK at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to five discs. After that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch- ing BOOKMARK during playback. # Y ou can also bookmark a disc by pressing and holding EJECT at the point you want to bookmark. Next time you load the disc, playback will resume from the bookmarked point. Note that you can only bookmark one disc using this method. T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press EJECT . Searching for the part you want to play Y ou can use the search function to find the part you want to play. ! This function is available for DVD, DivX disc and Video CD. ! Chapter search, track search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. 1 T ouch SEARCH. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch the desired search option (e.g., CHAP .). # Y ou cannot operate this step during DivX disc playback. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. # In the time search function, to select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1 , 0 and 0 in that order . 4 T ouch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected part. Note With DVD discs featuring a menu, you can also touch MENU or TOP MENU and then make se- lections from the displayed menu. Operating this unit En 25 Section 03 Operating this unit
Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. ! This function is available for DVD and DivX disc. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO it switches be- tween audio systems. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD SETUP . For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 38. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit âÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. ! T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playb ack (Multi-subtitle ) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. ! This function is available for DVD and DivX disc. % T ouch SUBTITLE during playback. Each time you touch SUBTITLE it switches be- tween subtitle languages. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD SETUP . For details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 38. ! T ouching SUBTITLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback re- turns you to normal playback. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using DVD SETUP. F or details, refer to Set- ting the angle icon display on page 39. % T ouch ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. Each time you touch ANGLE it switches be- tween angles. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Note T ouching ANGLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Operating this unit En 26 Section 03
Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. ! This function is available for DVD and Video CD. % T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch de. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. ! This function is available for DVD and Video CD. % Keep touching r until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T ouching q or r during slow motion play- back, you can change the playback speed in four steps as follows: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 ! During DVD playback, only the remote con- trol can per form this operation. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # T o return to normal playback, touch de. Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. Return to the specified scene Y ou can return to the specified scene where the DVD you are currently playing has been preprogrammed to return. ! This function is available for DVD video. % T ouch RETURN to return to the speci- fied scene. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # If a specified scene has not been prepro- grammed in DVD disc, this function is not possi- ble. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. % T ouch AUTO PLA Y to tur n automatic playback on. # T o turn automatic playback off , touch AUTO PLA Y again. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on the next page). T ext information T ext information recorded on a disc can be dis- played. T ext information is displayed on vari- able message area. ! This function is available for CD TEXT , com- pressed audio disc and DivX disc. Operating this unit En 27 Section 03 Operating this unit
Displaying text information % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: For CD TEXT discs : disc title â : disc artist name â : track title â : track artist name For compressed audio discs : folder name â : file name â : album title â : track title â : artist name For DivX discs : folder name â : file name Notes ! Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. ! If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No name). ! If specific information has not been recorded on a compressed audio disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO name). ! When playing back WMA files, album title is not displayed. Selecting tracks from the track list T rack list lets you see the list of tracks on a disc and select one of them to play back. When playing a CD TEXT disc, track titles are displayed. ! This function is available for CD. 1 T ouch LIST. 2 T ouch or to switch between the lists of tracks. 3 T ouch your favorite track. That selection will begin to play . 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Selecting files from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! This function is available for compressed audio disc and DivX disc. 1 T ouch LIST. 2 T ouch or to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite file name (or folder name). That selection will begin to play . # When you have selected a folder , a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the desired file name. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), touch . # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play T racks in a play range are played repeatedly. Play range varies depending on the media. Operating this unit En 28 Section 03
F or DVD, play range can be selected from DISC (disc repeat), TITLE (title repeat) and CHAPTER (chapter repeat). F or Video CD and CD, play range can be se- lected from DISC (disc repeat) and TRACK (track repeat). F or compressed audio and DivX, play range can be selected from DISC (disc repeat), FOLDER (folder repeat) and FILE (file repeat). ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! TITLE â Repeat the current title ! CHAPTER â Repeat the current chapter ! TRACK â Repeat the current track ! FILE â Repeat just the current file ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! DISC â Play through the current disc Notes ! If you per form chapter search or fast for ward/ reverse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing back compressed audio or DivX, if you per form track search or fast for- ward/reverse during FILE, the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . ! When playing back Video CD or CD, if you per- form track search or fast for ward/reverse dur- ing TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in random order T racks in a selected repeat range are played in random order . ! This function is available for CD and com- pressed audio disc. 1 Select the repeat range . Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected repeat range. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks or folders Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. When playing the compressed audio disc, the first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. ! This function is available for CD and com- pressed audio disc. 1 Select the repeat range . Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 3 When you find the desired track (or folder) touch SCAN again. Note After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. When playing Video CD discs, you can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. Operating this unit En 29 Section 03 Operating this unit
! This function is available for DVD and Video CD. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. ! If you selec t Linear PCM , when playing a disc recorded on a dual mono mode, you can operate this function. (Refer to Setting for digital output on page 41.) % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. T ouch L/R SELECT repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display . ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right ! MIX â mixing left and right Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the function may not be selectable, indicating that operating this function is not pos- sible. Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function lets you adjust the sound playback quality of this unit. % T ouch COMPRESSION on the function menu to select your favorite setting. OFF âÂÂCOMP1 âÂÂCOMP2 Playing songs on iPod Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control an iP od by using a cable (e.g., CD-IU205V), which is sold separately . 1 Source icon 2 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is set to ONE or ALL . 3 Song number indicator 4 Title indicator 5 Shuffle indicator Shows when random play is set to SONGS or ALBUMS . 6 Play time indicator 7 Song information Shows detailed information of currently play- ing song. 8 Battery charging indicator Shows when the batter y charge setting is on. 1 Connect the iPod to this unit. Playback will automatically start. While connected to this unit, PIONEER, Acces- sory Attached or (check mark) is displayed on the iP od. # Before connecting the dock connector of this unit to the iP od, disconnect the headphones from the iP od. # Depending on the model of iP od or the data size in the iP od, there may be a delay to start play- ing after connection. # After the iP od has been connected to this unit, use touch panel keys to select the iP od. Operating this unit En 30 Section 03
# When removing the iP od from this unit, this unit is turned off . 2 T o skip back or forward to another song, touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another song by pressing c or d ( TRACK). 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). 4 When playing a file with chapter , touch o or p to select a chapter . # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Notes ! Read the precautions for iP od in the following section. Refer to page 94. ! If an error message or icon such as ERROR-11 or is displayed, refer to Error messages on page 87. ! Connect directly the dock connector cable to the iP od so that this unit works properly . ! When the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON, the iP od âÂÂs batter y is charged while the iP od is connected to this unit. ! While the iP od is connected to this unit, the iP od cannot be turned on or off . ! The iP od is turned off about two minutes af ter the ignition switch is set to OFF . Playing video This unit can play video if an iPod with video capabilities is connected. ! T o pause video playback, touch MENU. ! This unit can play back âÂÂMovies âÂÂ, âÂÂMusic vi- deos âÂÂ, âÂÂVideo P odcast â and âÂÂTV show â which are downloaded from iT unes store. ! Change the video setting on the iP od so that the iP od can output the video to an ex- ternal device, before you display the video screen. ! F or details, refer to the iP od âÂÂs manuals. 1 T ouch Video. # T o return to the music operation screen, touch Music . 2 Play video on the iPod. Browsing for a song/video Operations to control an iP od with this unit is designed to be as close to the iP od as possible to make operation and song/video search easy . ! If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compa tible with this unit, those charac- ters are not displayed. 1 T ouch MENU to display iPod menus. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song/video. When browsing for a song ! PLA YLISTS (playlists) ! ARTISTS (artists) ! ALBUMS (albums) ! SONGS (songs) ! PODCASTS (podcasts) ! GENRES (genres) ! COMPOSERS (composers) ! AUDIOBOOKS (audiobooks) When browsing for a video ! V .PLA YLISTS (video playlists) ! Movies ! Music videos ! Video podcasts ! TV shows # T o switch between groups of categories, touch PREV or NEXT . 3 T ouch a list title that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired song/video. # Y ou can start playback throughout the se- lected list by touching and holding desired list title. # Y ou can start a playback of all the songs in the selected list ( GENRES , ARTISTS , COMPOSERS or ALBUMS ). T o do this, touch ALL. Operating this unit En 31 Section 03 Operating this unit
# Y ou can start a playback of all the videos in the selected list (Music videos or TV shows). T o do this, touch ALL . # T o switch between the lists of titles, touch or . # T o return to the previous menu, touch MENU. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Displaying text information on iPod % T ouch INFO to select the desired text in- formation. : song title â : artist name â : album title # If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with this unit, those characters are not displayed. Repeating play F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two repeat play ranges: ONE (repeat one song) and ALL (repeat all songs in the list). ! While repeat play range is set to ONE, you cannot select the other songs. However , you can select other songs while browsing. 1 T ouch NEXT. 2 T ouch to select the repeat range. ! ONE â Repeat just the current song ! ALL â Repeat all songs in the selected list # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) F or playback of songs on the iP od, there are two random play methods: SONGS (play back songs in a random order) and ALBUMS (play back albums in a random order). % T ouch to select the random play method. ! SONGS â Play back songs in the selected list in random order . ! ALBUMS â Play back songs from a ran- domly selected album in order . # T o cancel the random play , touch repeat- edly until the shuffle icon is turned off . Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle all) This method plays all songs on the iP od ran- domly . % T ouch to tur n shuffle all on. All songs on the iP od play randomly . Operating this unit â s iPod function from your iPod This unit âÂÂs iP od function can be operated from your iPod. Sound can be heard from the car âÂÂs speakers, and operation can be conducted from your iP od. ! While this function is in use, even if the ignition key is turned off , the iP od will not be turned off . T o turn off power , operate the iP od. 1 T ouch to switch the control mode. # T ouching switches the control mode to this unit. # While using this function, play time and titles are not displayed on this unit. # Even if this function is per formed, track up/ down, chapter up/down and fast for ward/reverse can be operated from this unit. # While using this function, browse function cannot be operated from this unit. 2 Operate the connected iPod to select a song/video and play . Operating this unit En 32 Section 03
Pausing a song % T ouch de during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch de again . Selecting songs from album list of currently playing artist Album list of the currently selected artist is displayed. Y ou can select an album or song from the artist name. ! This function is not available for video files. ! Depending on the number of files in the iP od, there may be a delay when displaying a list. 1 T ouch NEXT. 2 T ouch LINK SEARCH to turn link search on. Searches albums of the artist and displays the list. 3 T ouch a list title that you want to play . F or more details about the selecting operation, please see Step 3 of the following section. Refer to Browsing for a song/video on page 31. Note If link search is aborted, NOT FOUND is dis- played. Changing audiobook speed While listening to an audiobook on iPod, play- back speed can be changed. % T ouch A.Book to select your favorite setting. ! FASTER â Playback faster than normal speed ! NORMAL â Playback in normal speed ! SLOWER â Playback slower than normal speed # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Playing songs on USB portable audio player/USB memory Basic Operations F or details about the supported device, refer to P ortable audio player compatibility on page 11. 1 Source icon 2 Media indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 3 F older number indicator 4 File number indicator 5 Title indicator 6 Play time indicator 7 Song information Shows detailed information of currently play- ing song. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch USB to select the USB. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch a or b to select a folder . # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. is displayed only when the list is operated. # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Operating this unit En 33 Section 03 Operating this unit
4 T o skip back or forward to another compressed audio file, briefly touch o or p . # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another audio file by pressing c or d ( TRACK). Notes ! Optimum performance of this unit may not be obtained depending on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y . ! If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. ! When the USB portable audio player having batter y charging function is connected to this unit and the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON, the batter y is charged. ! Y ou can disconnect the USB portable audio player/USB memory anytime you want to fin- ish listening to it. Pausing compressed audio playback % T ouch de during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch de again . Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM and SCAN operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 28. However , the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player . The repeat play ranges of the USB por- table audio player/USB memor y are: ! FILE â Repeat just the current file ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! ALL â Repeat all files RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 29. SCAN Refer to Scanning tracks or folders on page 29. Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to ALL . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during FILE , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! After file or folder scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the files begins again. Displaying text information of an audio file The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to T ext information on page 27. ! If the characters recorded on the audio file are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Selecting files from the file name list The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Selecting files fr om the file name list on page 28. Operating this unit En 34 Section 03
Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 1 Audio display Shows the audio adjustment status. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, the audio function will be changed to the multi-channel processor âÂÂs audio menu. F or details, refer to Introduction of DSP ad- justments on page 74. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch AUDIO MENU to display the audio function names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When selecting FM and Bluetooth telephone as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . 2 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide the ideal listening environ- ment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER/BALANCE on the audio function menu. # When the rear output setting is S.W , BALANCE will be displayed instead of FADER/BAL ANCE . Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 42. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/r ear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :15 to REAR:15 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR: 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # When the rear output setting is S.W , you can- not adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 42. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT :15 to RIGHT :15 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match the car âÂÂs interior acoustic charac ter- istics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves. Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL Powerful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal CUSTOM Custom Operating this unit En 35 Section 03 Operating this unit
FLA T Flat SUPER BASS Super bass ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer cur ve that you create. If you make adjustments to an equalizer cur ve, the equalizer cur ve set- ting is memorized in CUSTOM . ! When FLA T is selected, no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂCUSTOM â FLA T âÂÂSUPER BASS Adjusting equalizer curves Y ou can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (cur ve characteristics) of each currently selected cur ve band ( LOW/ MID/ HIGH). ! The actual range of the adjustments are dif- ferent depending on which equalizer cur ve is selected. Level (dB) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W F requency (Hz) 1 T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c or d next to EQ SELECT to se- lect an equalizer curve. POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂCUSTOM â FLA T âÂÂSUPER BASS 3 T ouch c or d next to BAND to select the equalizer band to adjust. LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) 4 T ouch c or d next to FREQUENCY to se- lect the frequency to adjust. Low : 40Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ160Hz Mid: 200Hz âÂÂ500Hz âÂÂ1kHz âÂÂ2kHz High: 3.15kHz âÂÂ8kHz âÂÂ10kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz 5 T ouch c or d next to Q.FACTOR to se- lect the Q factor . 2W âÂÂ1W âÂÂ1N âÂÂ2N 6 T ouch a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. 12dB to -12dB is displayed as the level is in- creased or decreased. # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 T ouch LOUDNESS on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch d to turn loudness on. # T o turn loudness off , touch c. 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . ! When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut- off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . 1 T ouch SUB WOOFER on the audio func- tion menu. 2 T ouch d next to SUB WOOFER to tur n subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch c. Operating this unit En 36 Section 03
3 T ouch c or d next to PHASE to select the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display. T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display . 4 T ouch c or d next to LEVEL to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . 6 to âÂÂ24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 5 T ouch c or d next to FREQUENCY to se- lect cut-off frequency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the subwoo- fer . Boosting the bass Bass boost function boosts the bass level of sound. 1 T ouch BASS BOOSTER on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. 0 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. 1 T ouch HPF on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch d next to HPF to turn high pass filter on. # T o turn high pass filter off , touch c. 3 T ouch c or d next to FREQUENCY to se- lect cut-off frequency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies higher than those in the se- lected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 T ouch NEXT on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch SLA. 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 to âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Operating this unit En 37 Section 03 Operating this unit
Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 T ouch g. SETUP will be displayed instead of MENU . 2 T ouch SETUP. The DVD setup function names are displayed. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 T ouch SUB TITLE LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. A subtitle language is set. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching SUBTITLE during playback. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 26.) ! Even if you use SUBTITLE during playback to switch the subtitle language, this does not af- fect the settings here. When you select OTHERS When you select OTHERS , a language code input display is shown. Please see the follow- ing section to input the four-digit code of the desired language. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 97. 1 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 2 T ouch ENTER. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 T ouch AUDIO LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. An audio language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on this page. Operating this unit En 38 Section 03
Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching AUDIO during playback. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 26.) ! Even if you use AUDIO during playback to switch the audio language, this does not af- fect the settings here. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 T ouch MENU LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. A menu language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is dis- played. Switching the assist subtitle on or off If assist subtitles are recorded on a DVD disc, you can display them by turning the assist subtitle function on. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. % T ouch ASSIST SUBTITLE on the DVD setup menu to turn assist subtitles on. # T o turn the assist subtitle off , touch ASSIST SUBTITLE again. Setting the angle icon display Y ou can set it up so that the angle icon ap- pears on scenes where the angle can be switched. ! Initially , this function is set to on. % T ouch MUL TI ANGLE on the DVD setup menu to turn angle icon display on. # T o turn the angle icon display off , touch MUL TI ANGLE again. Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT . ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P AN SCAN . Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you selec t the TV aspect, the unit âÂÂs dis- play changes to the same setting. % T ouch TV ASPECT on the DVD setup menu to select the TV aspect. T ouch TV ASPECT repeatedly until the desired TV aspect appears in the display. ! 16 : 9 â Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P AN SCAN â The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Operating this unit En 39 Section 03 Operating this unit
Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P AN SCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P AN SCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (Refer to page 14.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. F or details, refer to the disc âÂÂs instruc- tions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set the par- ental lock to your desired level. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level Y ou need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parental lock. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch P ARENT AL. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code number . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 4 T ouch ENTER. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 5 T ouch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired level. The parental lock level is set. ! LEVEL 8 â Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 to LEVEL 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Look for the level indication written at the disc package, included literature or on the disc it- self . P arental lock of this unit is not possible if a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch P ARENT AL. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the registered code number . 4 T ouch ENTER. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and input the cor - rect code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 5 T ouch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired level. The new parental lock level is set. If you forget your code number Please see the following section, and touch C 10 times. Refer to Changing the level on this page. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Operating this unit En 40 Section 03
Setting the DivX subtitle file Y ou can select whether to display DivX exter- nal subtitles or not. ! The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when CUSTOM is selected if no DivX exter- nal subtitle files exist. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch DivX SUB TITLE to select the de- sired subtitle setting. ! ORIGINAL â Display the DivX subtitles ! CUSTOM â Display the DivX external subti- tles Notes ! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. If more than 42 characters are set, the line breaks and the characters are displayed on the next line. ! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen. If more than 126 characters are set, the excess characters will not be displayed. Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . Y ou do this by generating a DivX VOD registra- tion code, which you submit to your provider . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch DivX VOD. Y our 8-digit registration code is displayed. ! Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider . Setting for digital output Audio which is outputted from digital output of this unit can be selected. Normally , set to STREAM . If this unit âÂÂs digital output is not used, there is no need to change settings. ! Selecting Linear PCM enables you to switch the output channel if playing the fol- lowing type of discs. (Refer to Selecting audio output on page 29.) â Dual mono mode DVD video discs 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch DIGIT AL OUTPUT to select the de- sired digital output setting. ! STREAM â The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is output as it is (initial setting) ! Linear PCM â The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is converted to and output as a linear PCM signal Operating this unit En 41 Section 03 Operating this unit
Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. 1 F unction display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn this unit off. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch AV MENU and then touch INITIAL MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliar y devices connected to this unit can be activated individually . Set each AUX source to ON when using. F or more information about connecting or using auxiliar y devices, refer to Using the AUX source on page 49. Switching the auxiliary 1 setting % T ouch AUX1 on the initial menu to se- lect desired setting. ! VIDEO â an iP od with video capabilities connected with 4-pole mini plug cable (e.g., CD- V150M) ! AUDIO â auxiliar y device connected with a stereo mini plug cable ! OFF â No auxiliar y device is connected Switching the auxiliary 2 setting % T ouch AUX2 on the initial menu to turn auxiliary 2 setting on. # T o turn auxiliar y 2 setting off , touch AUX2 again. Setting the rear output and subwoofer contro ller This unit âÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put and RCA rear output) can be used for full- range speaker ( FULL) or subwoofer ( S.W) con- nection. If you switch the rear output setting to S.W, you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxili- ar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for rear full-range speak- er connection ( FULL). When rear output is connected to full range speakers (when FULL is selected), you can connect other full range speakers ( REAR) or a subwoofer ( S.W) to the RCA rear output. ! When the multi-channel processor (DEQ- P8000) is connected to this unit, you can- not operate this function. 1 T ouch REAR SP on the initial menu. 2 T ouch c or d next to REAR SP to switch the re ar output setting. T ouch c to select full-range speaker and FULL appears in the display . T ouch d to select sub- woofer and S.W appears in the display . # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select FULL (full-range speaker). Operating this unit En 42 Section 03
# When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select S.W (subwoofer). # When the rear output setting is S.W , you can- not operate the following procedure. 3 T ouch c or d next to PREOUT to switch the subwoofer output or rear output. T ouching c or d will switch between S.W and REAR and that status will be displayed. Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the subwoofer output on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 36). ! If you change this setting, subwoofer output in the audio menu will return to the factor y settings. ! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. Changing languages for CAUTION Some operations on this unit are prohibited while driving or needs to be paid a careful at- tention when operating. In such case, a cau- tion appears on the display . Y ou can change the language of the cautions at this setting. % T ouch CAUTION LANGUAGE on the in- itial menu to select your desired language. Each time you touch CAUTION LANGUAGE it selects languages for CAUTION in the follow- ing order : ENGLISH âÂÂESP AÃÂOL âÂÂFRANÃÂAIS Switching the sound muting/ attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated autom atically when the signal from the equipment with mute function is received. ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is can- celed. % T ouch TEL to select any of the muting, attenuation or off. T ouch TEL until the desired setting appears in the display . ! MUTE â Muting ! A TT -20dB â Attenuation (A TT -20dB has a stronger effect than A TT -10dB ) ! A TT -10dB â Attenuation ! OFF â T urn the sound muting/attenuation off Notes ! The sound is turned off , MUTE is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible. ! The sound is attenuated, AT T is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Switching the warni ng tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within four seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone sounds. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. 1 T ouch NEXT on the initial menu. 2 T ouch DT .W ARNING to turn warning tone on. # T o turn warning tone off , touch DT .WARNING again. Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection T o connect your cellular phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology , you need to enter PIN code on your phone to verif y the connection. The default code is 0000 , but you can change this in this function. ! With some Bluetooth audio players, you may be required to enter the Bluetooth audio player PIN code in advance to set this unit for a connection. Operating this unit En 43 Section 03 Operating this unit
! Y ou can only operate this function when Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) is con- nected to this unit. 1 T ouch NEXT on the initial menu. 2 T ouch PINCODE INPUT. PIN code input display appears. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 4 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 di- gits), touch ENTER. The PIN code you entered is stored in this sys- tem. Correcting distorted sound Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer curve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW . Normally , leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch NEXT on the initial menu. 2 T ouch DIGIT AL A TT to switch the digital attenuator setting. T ouch DIGIT AL A TT repeatedly until the de- sired setting appears in the display . ! HIGH â High quality sound ! LOW â Minimize distortion sound Resetting the audio functions Y ou can reset all audio functions except vo- lume. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch NEXT on the initial menu. 2 T ouch AUDIO RESET. 3 T ouch RESET. 4 T ouch RESET again to reset audio func- tions. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, touch CANCEL . Operating this unit En 44 Section 03
Other Functions Introduction of system adjustments 1 System menu display Shows the system function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch SYSTEM MENU to display the system func- tion names. The system function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 2 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Changing the wide screen mode Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. 1 T ouch WIDE MODE on the system menu. 2 T ouch the desired wide mode setting. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. FULL (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only , giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic- ture) without any omissions. JUST (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. CINEMA (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as FULL or ZOOM in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between FULL and ZOOM in the vertical direction; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside. ZOOM (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally ; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture). NORMAL (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear different. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! The video image will appear coarser when viewed in CINEMA or ZOOM mode. Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can adjust the BRIGHTNESS (brightness), CONTRAST (contrast), COLOR (color) and HUE (hue) for each source and rear view cam- era. ! Y ou cannot adjust COLOR or HUE for the audio source. Operating this unit En 45 Section 03 Operating this unit
1 T ouch PICTURE ADJUSTMENT on the system menu. The adjustment function names are displayed. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. ! BRIGHTNESS â Adjusts the black intensity ! CONTRAST â Adjusts the contrast ! COLOR â Adjusts the color saturation ! HUE â Adjusts the tone of color (red is em- phasized or green is emphasized) ! DIMMER â Adjust the brightness of display ! REAR VIEW /SOURCE â Switch the picture adjustment modes # Y ou cannot adjust the picture adjustment for rear view camera when CAMERA POLARITY is set to OFF . (Re fer to Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) on the next page.) # With some rear view cameras, picture adjust- ment may not be possible. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the selected item. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the level of selected item. 24 to â 24 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Adjusting the dimmer T o prevent the display from being too bright at night, the display is automatically dimmed when the car âÂÂs headlights are turned on. Y ou can turn the dimmer on or off . 1 T ouch PICTURE ADJUSTMENT on the system menu. The adjustment function names are displayed. 2 T ouch DIMMER. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the brightness. Each time you touch c or d it moves cursor towards the left or the right. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The farther the cursor moves to the right, the brighter the screen be- comes. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Selecting the background display Y ou can switch background displays while lis- tening to each source. ! Y ou can enjoy AV (AV input) as the back- ground video image while you are listening to audio source such as radio or CD. % T ouch BACKGROUND on the system menu to select the desired background dis- play . Audio source BGP1 (background picture 1) âÂÂBGP2 (back- ground picture 2) â BGP3 (background picture 3) â AV (A V input) Video source OFF (off) âÂÂBGP1 (background picture 1) â BGP2 (background picture 2) âÂÂBGP3 (back- ground picture 3) â AV (AV input) # When the AV (AV input) is not set to VIDEO , AV cannot be selected. (Refer to this page.) Setting the A V input Y ou can switch the setting according to the connected component. ! Select VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected component as AV source. ! Select S-DVD to watch video of a con- nected DVD player as S-DVD source. ! Select EXT -VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected video unit as EXT source. ! Select TV to watch TV pictures from a con- nected TV tuner as TV source. % T ouch A V INPUT on the system menu to select the A V input setting. ! OFF â No video component connected ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) ! S-DVD â DVD player connected with RCA cable Operating this unit En 46 Section 03
! EXT -VIDEO â External video unit (such as P ioneer products available in the future) ! TV â TV tuner connected with RCA cable Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 T ouch CLOCK ADJ on the system menu. 2 T ouch ON/OFF to turn the clock display on. # T o turn the clock display off , touch ON/OFF again. 3 T ouch c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Each time you touch c or d it will select one segment of the clock display : Hour âÂÂMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will be highlighted. 4 T ouch a or b to put a clock right. Notes ! Y ou can match the clock to a time signal by touching JUST . â If 00 to 29, the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00.) â If 30 to 59, the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00.) ! Even when the sources are off , the clock dis- play appears on the display . Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, other- wise screen image may appear reversed. This unit features a function that automatically switches to the rear view camera video ( REAR CAMERA IN jack) when a rear view camera is installed on your vehicle. When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) position, the video auto - matically switches to a rear view camera video. (For more details, consult your dealer .) ! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shif t in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display . ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving forward, change the rear view cam- era setting. ! T o end watching a rear view camera video and return to the source display , press and hold VOLUME/MUTE. ! Even while driving, rear view camera image can be displayed. T o do this, touch REARVIEW source icon. In this case, touch REARVIEW again to turn off the rear view camera. F or details, refer to Selecting a source on page 17. % T ouch CAMERA POLARITY on the sys- tem menu to select an appropriate setting. ! BA TTER Y â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! GROUND â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! OFF â When a rear view camera is not con- nected to this unit Adjusting the LCD panel slide position Y ou can adjust the LCD panel slide position so that the panel is set back or for ward. 1 T ouch NEXT on the system menu. 2 T ouch FLAP SET BACK to turn the set back on. The LCD panel slides to the back. # T ouch FLAP SET BACK again to turn the set back off and the LCD panel slides to the front. Operating this unit En 47 Section 03 Operating this unit
Setting the automatic open function T o prevent the display from hitting the shift lever of an automatic vehicle when it is in P (park) position, or when you do not wish the display to open/close automatically , you can set the automatic open function in the manual mode. 1 T ouch NEXT on the system menu. 2 T ouch AUTO FLAP to select the display to open/close automatically or manually . Each time you touch AUTO FLAP it switches between the following settings: ! ON â The LCD panel will be opened or closed automatically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off ! OFF â Y ou have to press OPEN/CLOSE to open/close the LCD panel Switching the iPod charge setting Y ou can turn the iP od charge setting on or off while listening to an iP od. ! Listening AM radio while an iP od is charged from this unit may generate noise. In this case, turn the iP od charge setting off and noise is disappeared. ! Initially , this function is set to on. 1 T ouch NEXT on the system menu. 2 T ouch iPod CHARGE to turn the iPod charge setting on. # T o turn the iPod charge setting off , touch iPod CHARGE again. Note F or maximum per formance, we recommend that you use the latest version of the iP od software. Selecting the OSD color Y ou can change the OSD color . 1 T ouch NEXT on the system menu. 2 T ouch OSD COLOR to select the desired color . BLUE (blue) âÂÂRED (red) âÂÂAMBER (amber) â GREEN (green) â VIOLET (violet) Selecting the illumination color This unit is equipped with multiple-color illu- mination. Y ou can select a desired color from 112 different types of color . Direct selection from preset illumination color Y ou can select an illumination color from the color list. 1 T ouch ILLUMI COLOR to display the set- ting menu. 2 T ouch one of the color list. Y ou can select one from the following list. ! BLUE (blue) ! RED (red) ! AMBER (amber) ! GREEN (green) ! VIOLET (violet) ! SCAN (scanning all colors) Note SCAN setting cycles continuously through all the colors. Customizing the illumination color 1 T ouch ILLUMI COLOR to display the set- ting menu. 2 T ouch to display the customizing menu. 3 Rotate VOLUME/MUTE to customize the color . Operating this unit En 48 Section 03
4 T o store the customized color in mem- ory , touch and hold one of preset keys ( ) 1 to 3 until the beep sounds. The customized color has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset key , the color is recalled from memor y . Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po- sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad- justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! Make sure to use the supplied pen for ad- justment, and gently touch the screen. If you press the touch panel forcefully , the touch panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen. Other wise the screen is damaged. ! If touch panel adjustment cannot be per- formed properly , consult your local Pioneer dealer . 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn this unit off. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 Press and hold EJECT ( h). The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap- pears. 3 T ouch each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold VOLUME/MUTE . 4 Press EQ to complete the 4-point ad- justment. The adjusted position data is saved. # Do not turn off the engine while saving the ad- justed position data. 5 Press EQ to proceed to the 16-point ad- justment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold VOLUME/MUTE . 6 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. After you touch all the marks, the adjusted po - sition data is saved. # Do not turn off the engine while saving the ad- justed position data. 7 Press and hold VOLUME/MUTE to com- plete the adjustment. Using the AUX source A separately sold auxiliar y device such as VCR or portable device can be connected to this unit. When connected, auxiliar y device is auto- matically recognized as AUX source and as- signed to AUX. About AUX connection method Y ou have two methods to connect auxiliar y de- vice to this unit. Mini pin plug cable ( AUX 1) When connecting auxiliar y device using a mini plug cable iP od and portable audio/video player can be connected to this unit via mini plug cable. ! If an iP od with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) cable (e.g., CD-V150M), you can enjoy the video contents of the iP od. Operating this unit En 49 Section 03 Operating this unit
! It is possible to connect a portable audio/ video player by using a 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) to RCA cable, which is sold sepa- rately . However , depending on the cable, re- verse connection between red (right side audio) cable and yellow (video) cable is re- quired. Otherwise, audio and video may not be correctly reproduced. % Insert the mini plug into the AUX input jack on this unit. F or more details, refer to What âÂÂs what on page 16. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector ( AUX 2) When connecting auxiliar y device using an IP - BUS-RCA Interc onnector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) to connect this unit to auxiliary device fea- turing RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Inter- connector owner âÂÂs manual. # Y ou can only make this type of connection if the auxiliar y device has RCA outputs. Selecting AUX as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch AUX 1/AUX 2 to select AUX as the source. # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. F or more details, refer to Switching the auxiliar y setting on page 42. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. ! Each title can be up to 10 characters long. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, touch A V MENU and FUNCTION MENU and then touch NAME EDIT. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. 2 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character types: Alphabet (upper case) âÂÂAlphabet (lower case) â European letters, such as those with ac- cents (e.g., á, à, ä, ç) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123 . 3 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. 4 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. 5 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 6 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Using the exter nal unit External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as ones available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions with this unit. T wo external units can be controlled with this unit. When two external units are connected, the external unit is automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2 by this unit. Basic operations of the external unit are ex- plained below . Allocated functions are differ- ent depending on the connected external unit. F or details concerning functions, refer to exter- nal unit âÂÂs owner âÂÂs manual. Selecting the external unit as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch EXT 1/EXT 2 to select external unit as the source. Operating this unit En 50 Section 03
Basic operation F unctions allocated to the following opera- tions are different depending on the con- nected external unit. F or details concerning functions, refer to the connected external unit âÂÂs owner âÂÂs manual. % T ouch BAND. % Keep touching BAND. % T ouch c or d. % Keep touching c or d. % T ouch a or b. Using the functions allocated to 1 to 6 keys 1 T ouch NEXT. 2 T ouch any of 1 to 6 to select a function. Advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. ! FUNC1 (function 1) ! FUNC2 (function 2) ! FUNC3 (function 3) ! FUNC4 (function 4) ! AUTO/MANUAL (auto/manual) 2 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using PGM. ! Only the optional remote control (e.g., CD- R55) can operate this function. % Press PGM to turn pause on when se- lecting the following sources: ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! iPod â iP od ! USB â USB portable audio player/USB memor y ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! MCD â Multi-CD player ! BT Audio â Bluetooth audio player # T o turn pause off , press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSM on when selecting RADIO as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM to select the desired channel select setting when selecting XM or SIRIUS as the source. P ress PGM repeatedly to switch between the following channel select settings: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) Operating this unit En 51 Section 03 Operating this unit
XM tuner Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control an XM satellite digital tuner (GEX-P920XM), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the XM tuner âÂÂs operation manuals. This section provides information on XM operations with this unit which differs from that described in the XM tuner âÂÂs operation manual. ! This unit does not have the text scroll function. ! With this unit, you can operate one addi- tional function: XM channel direct selection. 1 Source icon 2 XM band indicator 3 XM channel categor y 4 XM channel select setting indicator Shows what channel select setting has been selected. 5 XM preset number indicator 6 XM channel number indicator 7 Detail information Shows the detail information of the broadcast channel currently being received. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch XM to select the XM. 2 T ouch BAND to select an XM band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired XM band is displayed, XM1 , XM2 or XM3. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired channel. The channels move up or down step by step. Channels that cannot currently be selected are skipped, and the next channel is selected. # If you touch and hold c or d, you can in- crease or decrease the channel number con- tinuously . # Y ou can also select a channel by pressing c or d ( TRACK). # Y ou can also per form tuning from a desired channel category. (Refer to Selecting a channel in the channel categor y on the next page.) Storing and recalling broadcast stations Y ou can easily store up to six broadcast sta- tions for later recall. ! Up to 18 stations, six for each of three XM bands can be stored in memor y . 1 Select the channel that you want to store in memory . 2 T ouch LIST to display the preset list. 3 T ouch and hold a preset tuning key P1 (PRESET1) to P6 (PRESET6) until the beep sounds. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key P1 (PRESET1) to P6 (PRESET6) the sta- tion is recalled from memor y. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning keys P1 (PRESET1) to P6 (PRESET6) when the CH-NUMBER mode is selected. A vailable accessories En 52 Section 04
Switching the XM channel select mode Y ou have two methods for selecting a channel: by number and by category. When selecting by number , channels in any categor y can be selected. Select by categor y to narrow your search down to only channels in a particular categor y . % T ouch MODE to select the desired chan- nel select mode. T ouch MODE repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) Selecting a channel in the channel category 1 T ouch MODE to select the channel cate- gory select mode. T ouch MODE repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) 2 T ouch a or b to select the desired chan- nel category . 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired chan- nel in the selected channel category . Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display The list content can be switched so you can search for the track you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM. ! The channel list shows all the channels during the CH-NUMBER mode, and the channels included in the selected categor y during the CA TEGORY mode. T o switch the channel mode, touch MODE . 1 T ouch . XM channel list appears in the display . Each touch of changes the following set- tings as follows: CHANNEL NAME LIST (channel name) â SONG TITLE LIST (song title) â ARTIST NAME LIST (artist name) 2 T ouch the desired channel that you want to listen to. # T o switch between the lists of names/titles, touch or . # When the CA TEGOR Y mode is selected, touch a or b to switch to another categor y . Selecting an XM channe l directly Y ou can select an XM channel directly by en- tering the desired channel number . 1 T ouch DIRECT. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired chan- nel number . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C. 3 T ouch ENTER. The XM channel of entered number is selected. Using the MyMix function The MyMix function allows you to make the MyMix song playlist. When the song in the MyMix playlist is being broa dcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can tune to the station to listen to that song. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM. ! A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the song title and the artist name are mem- orized. A vailable accessories En 53 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Making the MyMix playlist Y ou can add a song that is being broadcast to the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song title and its artist name is memorized to this unit. The MyMix function will start on the song that matches the song title and its artist name in the MyMix playlist. 1 When a desired song is broadcast, touch and hold MEMO. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized, and a confir- mation message appears. # The song title and artist name of up to 12 tracks can be memorized. T r ying to save more than 12 tracks will over write old ones. # Y ou cannot memorize the song title or the ar- tist name when â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ â is displayed on the title information. # Y ou cannot memorize the song title or the ar- tist name of the channel 000. # It is possible that the memorized title is not displayed correctly . 2 T ouch OK to confirm. ! T o delete the song from the MyMix playlist, refer to Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist on this page. When the song in the MyMix playlist is broadcast As soon as the song in the MyMix playlist starts broadcast on a different station, a mes- sage is displayed. T ouch YES to switch to that station, and you can listen to that song. ! If you would rather not to tune to that sta- tion, touch CANCEL . ! If an alert for the song in the MyMix playlist is set up to off , no alert will be provided even when the song is broadcast. Refer to Setting up a song alert on page 58. ! If there is slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast, no alert will be provided even though they are the same song. Setting up a song alert Y ou can set up an alert on or off by each song in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix playlist and then change each alert setting. Set up an alert to on so you can receive the alert when the song is broadcast, or set it up to off to stop the alert for that song. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The MyMix playlist is displayed. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch the song title that you want to set up the alert to off. The check mark is removed, and the alert for that song is off . Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist Y ou can delete each song in the MyMix playlist. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The MyMix playlist is displayed. 2 T ouch DELETE next to the song title you want to delete. That song will be deleted from the MyMix playlist. # T o delete all the songs in the MyMix playlist, touch DELETE ALL . 3 A message will appear asking you to confirm to delete it. T ouch YES. # T o cancel the deleting, touch NO. Displaying the Radio ID Channel number select setting If you selec t CH000 , the ID code is displayed. % T ouch c or d to select CH000. Channel category select setting RADIO ID is provided as a channel categor y for displaying the ID code. A vailable accessories En 54 Section 04
% T ouch a or b to select RADIO ID from channel category . Display of the ID code repeats displaying RADIO ID and the ID code one af ter the other . # If you select another channel, display of the ID code is canceled. Switching the XM display ! This function is available for GEX-P910XM. % T ouch INFO to switch the XM display . Channel name âÂÂArtist name/feature âÂÂSong/ program title âÂÂChannel categor y SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a SIRIUS Satel- lite Radio tuner , which is sold separately . When the SIRIUS tuner is used together with this unit, some operations differ slightly from those described in the SIRIUS operation man- ual. This manual provides information on these points. For all other information on using the SIRIUS tuner , please refer to the SIR - IUS operation manual. ! This unit does not have the text scroll function. ! With this unit, you can operate one addi- tional function: SIRIUS channel direct se- lection. Refer to Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly on page 57. 1 Source icon 2 SIRIUS band indicator 3 SIRIUS channel category 4 SIRIUS channel select setting indicator Shows what channel select setting has been selected. 5 SIRIUS preset number indicator 6 SIRIUS channel number indicator 7 Detail information Shows the detail information of the broadcast channel currently being received. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch SIRIUS to select SIRIUS. 2 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired SIR- IUS band is displayed, SR1, SR2 or SR3. A vailable accessories En 55 Section 04 A vailable accessories
# T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired channel. The channels move up or down step by step. Channels that cannot currently be selected are skipped, and the next channel is selected. # If you touch and hold c or d, you can in- crease or decrease the channel number con- tinuously . # Y ou can also select a channel by pressing c or d ( TRACK). # Y ou can also per form tuning from a desired channel category. (Refer to Selecting a channel in the channel categor y on this page.) Note It may take a few seconds before you can hear anything while this unit acquires and processes the satellite signal. Storing and recalling broadcast stations Y ou can easily store up to six broadcast sta- tions for later recall. ! Up to 18 stations, six for each of three SIR- IUS bands can be stored in memor y . ! Channels are stored and recalled on a broadcast station basis. This means that if the broadcast station you stored has been assigned to a different channel by SIRIUS, you can still recall the same broadcast sta- tion (though a different channel number may appear in the display). 1 Select the channel that you want to store in memory . 2 T ouch LIST to display the preset list. 3 T ouch and hold a preset tuning key PRESET1 to PRESET6 until the beep sounds. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key PRESET1 to PRESET6 the station is re- called from memor y . 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning keys PRESET1 to PRESET6 when the CH-NUMBER mode is selected. Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode Y ou have two methods for selecting a channel: by number and by category. When selecting by number , channels in any categor y can be selected. Select by categor y to narrow your search down to only channels in a particular categor y . % T ouch MODE to select the desired chan- nel select mode. T ouch MODE repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) Selecting a channel in the channel category Channels are organized into various program categories, e.g. Rock, Classi c, Jazz. Y ou can specify channels by selecting the desired categor y . 1 T ouch MODE to select the channel cate- gory select mode. T ouch MODE repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) 2 T ouch a or b to select the desired chan- nel category . 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired chan- nel in the selected channel category . A vailable accessories En 56 Section 04
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly Y ou can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number . 1 T ouch DIRECT. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired chan- nel number . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C. 3 T ouch ENTER. The SIRIUS channel of entered number is selected. Using the MyMix function The MyMix function allows you to make the MyMix song playlist. When the song in the MyMix playlist is being broa dcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can tune to the station to listen to that song. ! This function is available for CD -SB10/SIR - PNR2/SIR-PNR2C. ! A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the song title and the artist name are mem- orized. Making the MyMix playlist Y ou can add a song that is being broadcast to the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song title and its artist name is memorized to this unit. The MyMix function will start on the song that matches the song title and its artist name in the MyMix playlist. % When a desired song is broadcast, touch and hold MEMO. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized, and a confir- mation message appears. # The song title and artist name of up to 10 tracks can be memorized. When you tr y to save more than 10 tracks, FULL is displayed and that song being broadcast cannot be saved. # Y ou cannot memorize the song title or the ar- tist name of the channel 000. # It is possible that the memorized title is not displayed correctly . When the song in the MyMix playlist is broadcast As soon as the memorized song starts broad- cast on a different station, a song alert is dis- played. T ouch JUMP to switch to that station, and you can listen to that track. ! If you would rather not to tune to that sta- tion, touch ST A Y . ! If an alert for the song in the MyMix playlist is set up to off , no alert will be provided even when the song is broadcast. Refer to Setting up a song alert on the next page. ! If there is slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast, no alert will be provided even though they are the same song. T urning the MyMix function on or off Y ou can turn the MyMix function off and stop this unit to alert you for all the songs in the MyMix playlist. T o restart, turn this function on. ! The MyMix function is on at the default setting. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The display is switched to the memo edit mode. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch ALERT OFF to tur n the MyMix function off. The MyMix function is now off . # T o turn the MyMix function on , touch ALERT ON . A vailable accessories En 57 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Setting up a song alert Y ou can set up an alert on or off by each song in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix playlist and then change each alert setting. Set up an alert to on so you can receive the alert when the song is broadcast, or set it up to off to stop the alert for that song. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The display is switched to the memo edit mode. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to select the song title that you want to turn the alert off. 3 T ouch ON/OFF to turn the alert off. The alert for the song is turned off . Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist Y ou can delete each song in the MyMix playlist. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The song title in the MyMix playlist is dis- played. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to select the song title that you want to delete. 3 T ouch DELETE. 4 A message will appear asking you to confirm to delete it. T ouch YES. The selected song is deleted. # T o cancel the deleting, touch CANCEL. Using the Game Alert function This system can alert you when games invol- ving your favorite teams are about to start. T o use this function you need in advance to set up a game alert for the teams. ! This function is available for CD -SB10/SIR - PNR2/SIR-PNR2C. Selecting teams for Game Alert 1 T ouch TEAM SET. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT next to LEAGUE to select a desired league. League names are switched in the display . 3 T ouch PREV or NEXT next to TEAM to select a desired team. T eams in the selected categor y are switched in the display . 4 T ouch ON/OFF to store the selected team in memory . ON is displayed with the selected team, and the Game Alert function will start on that team. # T o turn the Game Alert off of the selected team, touch ON/OFF again. # When you have already made 12 team selec- tions, FULL is displayed and additional team se- lection is not possible. In this case, first delete the team selection and then tr y again. 5 Repeat these steps for selecting other teams. Up to 12 teams can be selected. Switching the Game Alert on or off Once you made team selections, you need to turn the Game Alert function on. ! The Game Alert function is on at the default setting. 1 T ouch TEAM SET. 2 T ouch ALERT ON to tur n the Game Alert on. The Game Alert function is now on. # T o turn the Game Alert function off , touch ALERT OFF . A vailable accessories En 58 Section 04
When the game of the selected team starts When a game of the selected team is about to start (or is currently playing) on a different sta- tion, a game alert is displayed. T ouch JUMP to switch to that station, and you can listen to that game. ! If you would rather not to tune to that sta- tion, touch ST A Y . Displaying game information If games of your selected teams are currently playing, you can display information of the games and tune to the broadcast channel. 1 T ouch GAME INFO. The game information of your selected team is displayed. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to select a game. The game is displayed, followed by more de- tailed game information. ! Game score will be updated automatically . 3 T ouch T une TO to switch to that station to listen to the game. Notes ! If you have not made any team selections, NOT SET is displayed. ! When games involving your favorite teams are not currently playing, NO GAME is displayed. Displaying the Radio ID If you selec t CH000 , the ID code is displayed. % T ouch c or d to select CH000. # T o select CH000 , set the channel select setting to CH-NUMBER . About the channel select set- ting, refer to Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode on page 56. Switching the SIRIUS display ! This function is available for SIR-PNR1. % T ouch INFO to switch the SIRIUS display . Channel name âÂÂArtist name/feature âÂÂSong/ program title âÂÂChannel categor y Using Instant Replay function F ollowing functions can be operated during the Instant Replay mode. ! T o use this function, Pioneer SIRIUS bus in- ter face (e.g. CD-SB10) is required. ! T o use this function, SIRIUS plug-and-play unit with Instant Replay F unction is re- quired. ! F or details, refer to SIRIUS plug-and-play unit âÂÂs manuals. % T ouch NEXT. % T ouch INST ANT REPLA Y. Instant Replay mode is displayed. Now , Instant Replay mode can be per formed. # In the following conditions, tuner exits from the Instant Replay mode. â When LIVE is touched â When another source is selected % Select a track T ouch c or d. % Pause and play T ouch de. % Fast forward or reverse T ouch and hold c or d for about one second and release. A vailable accessories En 59 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Bluetooth Audio Basic Operations If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD- BTB200) to this unit, you can control Bluetooth audio players via Bluetooth wireless technology . ! In some countries, CD-BTB200 is not sold on the mark et. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con- nected to this unit, the operations available with this unit are limited to the following two levels: â A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution P rofile): Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. â A VRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Con- trol P rofile): Playing back, pausing, select- ing songs, etc., are possible. ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this unit var y extensively . Refer to the instruction manual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this unit. ! Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can- not be displayed on this unit. ! While you are listening to songs on your Blue- tooth audio player , refrain from using on your cellular phone as much as possible. If you use your cellular phone, the signal from your cel- lular phone may cause noise on the song play- back. ! When you are talking on a cellular phone con- nected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology , song playback from your Bluetooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. ! Even if you are listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio player and you switch to an- other source, song playback continues. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief information on Blue- tooth audio player operations with this unit, which slightly differs or is abbreviated from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs op- eration manual. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth module, you can still control it from this unit via Bluetooth wire- less technology. T o control your audio player using this unit, connect a product featuring Bluetooth wireless technology (available on the market) to your audio player and connect the Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD -BTB200) to this unit. 1 Source icon 2 Device name Shows the device name of the connected Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adapter). 3 Connection indicator Shows the Bluetooth wireless connection sta- tus. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch BT Audio to select the Bluetooth audio source. # F or this unit to control your Bluetooth audio player it needs to establish a Bluetooth wireless connection. (Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on the next page.) 2 T ouch d . Playback starts. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, briefly touch o or p. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. A vailable accessories En 60 Section 04
5 T o stop playback, touch g. Pausing playback % T ouch e during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch d. Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Connecting a Bluetooth audio player % T ouch CONNECTION OPEN on the func- tion menu to turn the connection open on. CONNECTION W AITING is displayed. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player . If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, connection to this unit is automatically established. Note Before you can use audio players you may need to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player requires a PIN code to establish a connection, look for the code on the player or in its accompa- nying documentation . Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 43. Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player % T ouch DISCONNECT on the function menu. After the discon nection is completed, NO CONNECTION is displayed. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address % T ouch DEVICE INFO on the function menu to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the Bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! DEVICE NAME (device name of this sys- tem) ! BD ADDRESS (address of Bluetooth device) ! SYSTEM VERSION (system version) ! BT MODULE VERSION (version of Blue- tooth module) A vailable accessories En 61 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Bluetooth T elephone Basic Operations If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD- BTB200), you can connect a cellular phone fea- turing Bluetooth wir eless technology to this unit for hands-free, wir eless calls, even while driving. ! In some countries, CD-BTB200 is not sold on the mark et. Important ! Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless technology , using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. ! Advanced operations that require your atten- tion such as dialing numbers on the monitor , using phone book, etc., are prohibited while you are driving. When you need to use these advanced operations, stop your vehicle in a safe place. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief information on the hands-free phoning operations with this unit which slightly differs or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! This unit is not compa tible with registration for guest phone. ! This unit does not have the name edit func- tion of a Phone Book entr y . 1 Source icon 2 User number indicator Shows the registration number of the cellular phone. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the cellular phone. 4 Phone number Shows the phone number you selected. 5 V oice recognition indicator Shows when the voice recognition function is on (for more details, refer to V oice recognition on the next page). 6 Incoming call notice indication Shows when an incoming call has been re- ceived and not checked yet. ! Incoming call notice is not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. 7 Automatic answering/Automatic rejecting in- dicator Shows when the automatic answering func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting automatic answering on page 68). Shows when the automatic rejecting function is on (for more details, refer to Setting auto- matic rejecting on page 68). 8 Battery strength indicator Shows the batter y strength of cellular phone. ! The level shown on the indicator may differ from the actual batter y strength. ! If the batter y strength is not available, nothing is displayed in the batter y strength indicator area. 9 Signal level indicator Shows the signal strength of cellular phone. ! The level shown on the indicator may differ form the actual signal level. ! Depending on the cellular phones fea- turing Bluetooth wireless technology , radio field intensity is not available. In this case, the signal level indicator does not appear . ! If your cellular phone is out of ser vice, is displayed. a T elephone indicator A vailable accessories En 62 Section 04
Shows when a phone connection using Blue- tooth wireless technology is established (for more details, refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page). ! While connecting automatically, tele- phone indicator is flashing. % T ouch the source icon and then touch TEL to select the telephone. Note Equalizer cur ve for the phone source is fixed. When selecting the phone source, you cannot op- erate the equalizer function. Refer to Recalling equalizer cur ves on page 35. When the multi-channel processor is connected to this unit, you can operate the equalizer func- tion even when selecting the phone source. Refer to Recalling equalizer cur ves on page 81. Setting up for hands-fr ee phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you must set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection F or detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology , refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page. # Y our phone should now be temporarily con- nected. However , to make best use of the technol- ogy , we recommend you register the phone to this unit. 2 Registration T o register your temporarily connected phone, refer to Registering a connected cellular phone on page 65. 3 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular phone for comfort. When adjusted, the volume level is recorded in this unit as the default set- ting. # Caller âÂÂs voice volume and ring volume may var y depending on the type of cellular phone. # If the difference between the ring volume and caller âÂÂs voice volume is big, overall volume level may become unstable. # Before disconnecting the cellular phone from this unit, make sure to adjust the volume to a proper level. If the volume is muted (zero level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cel- lular phone remains muted even after the cellular phone is disconnected. Making a phone call V oice recognition 1 T ouch VOICE to turn the voice recogni- tion function on. V oice dial icon appears on the information bar . V oice recognition function is now ready. # T o cancel the voice recognition function, touch VOICE again. 2 Pronounce the name of your contact. T aking a phone call Answering an incoming call 1 When a call comes in, touch . # Y ou can also per form this operation by press- ing c ( TRACK). # If private mode is selected on the cellular phone, hands-free phoning may not be per- formed. 2 T o end the call, touch . # Y ou can also per form this operation by press- ing d ( TRACK). Rejecting an incoming call % When a call comes in, touch . The call is rejected. A vailable accessories En 63 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Answering a call waiting 1 T ouch to answer a call waiting. 2 T ouch to end all calls. # The caller you have been talking to is now on hold. T o end the call, both you and your caller need to hang up the phone. # While your callers hold the line, touching switches between callers. Rejecting call waiting % T ouch to reject a call waiting. Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the telephone standby display . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Connecting a cellular phone Searching for available cellular phones 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch SEARCH to search for available cellular phones. While searching, SEARCHING flashes. When available cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology are found, device name or Name Not Found (if names cannot be ob- tained) is displayed. # If this unit fails to find any available cellular phones, NOT FOUND is displayed. # Y ou can display the BD address by touching BD ADDR . T o return to the device name, touch PHONE NAME . 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, CONNECTING flashes. T o complete the connection, check the device name ( Pioneer BT unit2) and enter the link code on your cellular phone. If the connection is established, CONNECTED is displayed. # PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 43. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch CONNECTION OPEN. CONNECTION W AITING flashes and the unit is now on standby for connection from a cellu- lar phone. 3 Use cellular phone to connect to this unit. # T o cancel this function, touch CONNECTION OPEN again. # PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 43. Disconnecting a cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DISCONNECT to disconnect the currently connected cellular phone from this unit. After disconnection is completed, NO CONNECTION is displayed. A vailable accessories En 64 Section 04
Registering a connected cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. Registration assignments for user phone 1, 2 and 3 appear on the display . 2 T ouch and hold one of the registration assignments to register the currently con- nected phone. If the registration is succeeded, the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the selected assignment. # If the assignment is empty , the device name is not displayed. If the assignment is already taken, the device name appears. T o replace an assign- ment with a new phone, first delete the current assignment. For more detailed instructions, see Deleting a registered phone on this page. # If the registration failed, device name of the connected phone is not displayed in the selected assignment. In this case, return to step 1 and tr y again. Deleting a registered phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. 2 T ouch DELETE next to the device name you want to delete. A confirmation display appears. T ouch OK to delete the phone. # T o cancel deleting a registered phone, touch CANCEL . Connecting to a register ed cellular phone Connecting to a registered phone manually 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DIRECT CONNECT. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, CONNECTING is flashing. If the connection is established, CONNECTED is displayed. Connecting to a registered phone automatically 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch AUTO CONNECT to tur n the Automatic Connection function on. If your cellular phone is ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, connection to this unit is automatically established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch AUTO CONNECT again. Using the phone book T ransferring entries to the phone book The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 en- tries. 300 from User 1, 150 from User 2, and 50 from User 3. 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK TRANSFER on the function menu. 2 T ouch ST ART to turn the Phone Book T ransfer function on. The Phone Book T ransfer is now on standby . 3 Use the cellular phone to perform phone book transfer . P er form phone book transfer using the cellu- lar phone. For detailed instructions, refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone. # The display indicates how many entries have been transferred and the total number to be transferred. # T o cancel the transferring process, touch STOP . 4 When you are done transferring Phone Book entries, touch ESC. A vailable accessories En 65 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Note When the phone book transfer is complete, the connection to your cellular phone is off . T o use the Phone Book, connect to your cellular phone once again, referring to Connecting to a registered cellular phone on the previous page. Changing the phone book display order % T ouch PHONE BOOK NAME VIEW on the function menu to change the name view order . INVERTED is displayed and the name view order is changed. # T o change to the original order ( ORIGINAL), touch PHONE BOOK NAME VIEW again. Calling a number in the phone book Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 T ouch a or b to select the first letter of the name you are looking for . T ouching a or b changes alphabetical letters. 3 T ouch ENTER to show entries starting with the letter you chose. The display shows the first six Phone Book en- tries starting with that letter (e.g. âÂÂBen âÂÂ, â Brianâ and â Burtâ when â Bâ is selected). # T ouch or to display other phone book en- tries. # T o refine the search with a different letter , touch CLEAR . 4 T ouch a Phone Book entry you want to call. The display is switched to the Phone Book de- tail display. 5 T ouch phone number of the Phone Book entry you want to call. If several phone numbers are entered to an entr y , touch one you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the Phone Book entr y you selected is dis- played on the information bar . 6 T ouch to make a call. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 7 T o end the call, touch . Editing phone numbers Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . Y ou can edit the numbers of Phone Book en- tries. Each phone number can be up to 24 di- gits long. 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section for how to do this. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on this page. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the phone number you want to edit. The display is changed to the Phone Book dial edit display. 4 T ouch 0 to 9 to input numbers. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. 5 T ouch OK to store the new number . A vailable accessories En 66 Section 04
Clearing a phone book entry Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to delete. Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section for how to do this. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on the previous page. 3 T ouch DELETE to delete the Phone Book entry . A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the entr y . # If you do not want to clear a Phone Book entr y that you have selected, touch NO . Using the call history Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . The 6 most recent calls made (dialed), re- ceived and missed, are stored in the Call His- tor y . Y ou can browse the Call Histor y and call numbers from it. 1 T ouch LOG to display the Call History . 2 T ouch LOG repeatedly to switch the call histories. MISSED CALL LIST (missed call) â DIALED CALL LIST (dialed call) â RECEIVED CALL LIST (received call) # Y ou can switch between phone number and name (if entered) by touching ABC/123 . # If no phone numbers have been stored in the selected list, nothing is displayed. 3 T ouch a phone number or name (if en- tered) you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you selected is displayed on the information bar . 4 T ouch to make a call. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 5 T o end the call, touch . Using preset numbers Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . Assigning preset numbers Numbers that you dial frequently can be as- signed to presets for quick recall. Y ou can assign up to 6 frequently called phone numbers to number presets. 1 Select a desired phone number from the phone book or the call history . Or di- rectly enter a desired phone number . T o select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call Histor y , see the in- structions explained in previous pages. T o di- rectly enter a desired phone number , please see the following section. Refer to Making a call by entering phone number on the next page. The display should now be the normal display and the selected phone number is displayed on the information bar . 2 T ouch LIST to display preset assign- ments. P reset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 3 Keep touching one of preset assign- ments to store the phone number . The phone number you selected is stored in presets. A vailable accessories En 67 Section 04 A vailable accessories
# No Data is displayed for empty assignment. Even if the assignment is taken, you can replace it to the new one by keeping touching the assign- ment. Recalling preset numbers 1 T ouch LIST to display preset assign- ments. P reset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 2 T ouch one of preset assignments. The selected phone number should now be displayed on the information bar . 3 T ouch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . Making a call by entering phone number Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . 1 T ouch DIRECT to display the direct dial display . 2 T ouch 0 to 9 to input numbers. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. # Up to 24 digits can be entered. # If you want to store the entered phone number to preset assignment, touch SET here. The display returns to the normal display and the phone num- ber you entered is selected. 3 When you completed entering the number , touch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . Clearing memory 1 T ouch CLEAR MEMORY on the function menu. 2 T ouch CLEAR next to the item you want to delete from the memory . Select from the following: ! PHONE BOOK (phone book) ! DIALED CALLS (dialed call history) ! RECEIVED CALLS (received call histor y) ! MISSED CALLS (missed call history) ! DIAL PRESET (preset phone numbers) After selecting a desired item, a confirmation display appears. T ouch OK to delete the mem- or y . # If you do not want to clear memory that you have selected, touch CANCEL . # If you want to clear all the Phone Book, dia- led/received/missed call histor y list and preset phone number , touch CLEAR ALL. Setting automatic answering % T ouch AUTO ANSWER on the function menu to turn the automatic answer on. # T o turn the automatic answer off , touch AUTO ANSWER again. Setting automatic rejecting 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch REFUSE ALL CALLS to turn the automatic call rejection on. # T o turn the automatic call rejection off , touch REFUSE ALL CALLS again. Switching the ring tone 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch RING TONE to tur n the ring tone on. # T o turn the ring tone off , touch RING TONE again. A vailable accessories En 68 Section 04
Echo canceling and noise reduction 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch ECHO CANCEL to tur n Echo Can- cel function on. # T o turn echo canceling off , touch ECHO CANCEL again. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address Displaying BD address of this system 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DEVICE INFO to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the Bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! DEVICE NAME (device name of this sys- tem) ! BD ADDRESS (address of Bluetooth device) ! SYSTEM VERSION (version of this unit âÂÂs microprocessor) ! BT MODULE VERSION (version of Blue- tooth module) Displaying BD address of your cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch BD ADDRESS to display the BD address. 12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed. # T o return to the device name, touch PHONE NAME . Multi-CD Player Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a multi-CD player , which is sold separately . ! This unit does not have ITS playlist, disc title and track title list functions. ! Only functions described in this manual are supported by 50-disc multi- CD players. ! This unit is not designed to operate disc title list functions with a 50-disc multi- CD player . 1 Source icon 2 Disc number indicator 3 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs. 4 T rack number indicator 5 Play time indicator 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch MCD to select the multi-CD player . 2 T ouch a or b to select a disc. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, briefly touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another track by pressing c or d ( TRACK). 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Notes ! When multi-CD player completes preparator y operations, READY is displayed. A vailable accessories En 69 Section 04 A vailable accessories
! If an error message such as ERROR-02-XX is displayed, refer to the multi-CD player owner âÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. Selecting a disc 1 T ouch LIST. 2 T ouch your favorite disc. Selectable discs are highlighted. 3 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Pausing CD playback % T ouch de during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch de again . Introduction to advanced operations Y ou can only use these functions with a multi- CD player that supports them. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM, SCAN and COMPRESSION operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 28. However , the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player . The repeat play ranges of the multi- CD player are: ! MUL TI-CD â Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRACK â Repeat jus t the cur- rent track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 29. SCAN Refer to Scanning tracks or folders on page 29. COMPRESSION Refer to Using compr ession on page 30. Multi-CD player has COMP (com- pression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions. The settings can be switched as below : OFF âÂÂCOMP1 âÂÂCOMP2 âÂÂOFF â DBE 1 âÂÂDBE 2 Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to MUL TI-CD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! After track or disc scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks begins again. ! If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, you cannot operate this function. Using CD TEXT functions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to T ext information on page 27. A vailable accessories En 70 Section 04
DVD Player Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a DVD player or multi-DVD player , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player âÂÂs or multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player â so r multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. ! This unit does not have ITS playlist and disc title functions. 1 Source icon 2 Media indicator 3 Disc number indicator Shows the number of the disc currently play- ing when using a multi-DVD player . 4 Title/F older number indicator 5 Chapter/track number indicator 6 Play time indicator 7 V ariable message area Shows the text information of disc currently playing when playing a compressed audio disc. ! This unit cannot display the text infor- mation recorded on a CD TEXT disc playing on the optional DVD player . 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch S-DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter/track, briefly touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another chapter/track by pressing c or d ( TRACK). 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when playing DVD video or Video CD. Selecting a disc ! Y ou can operate this function only when a multi-DVD player is connected to this unit. 1 T ouch LIST. 2 T ouch your favorite disc. Selectable discs are highlighted. 3 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also select a disc by keeping touching a or b. Selecting a folder ! Y ou can operate this function only when a DVD player compatible with compressed audio playback is connected to this unit. % T ouch a or b to select a folder . Pausing disc playback % T ouch de during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch de again . A vailable accessories En 71 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM and SCAN operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 28. But the repeat play range that you can select is var y depe nding on the type of disc or system. The re- peat play ranges of the DVD player/multi-DVD player are as below : During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be oper- ated. ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! TITLE â Repeat just the current title ! CHAPTER â Repeat just the current chapter ! TRACK â Repeat the current track RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 29. SCAN Refer to Scanning tracks or folders on page 29. Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing back Video CD or CD, if you per- form track search or fast for ward/reverse dur- ing TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing back compressed audio, if you select another folder during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing back compressed audio, if you per form track search or fast forward/reverse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . Displaying text information of an audio file The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to T ext information on page 27. ! If the characters recorded on the audio file are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Selecting files from the file name list ! Y ou can operate this function only when a DVD player compatible with compressed audio playback is connected to this unit. 1 T ouch LIST to display the disc list. 2 T ouch LIST repeatedly to switch the lists. DISC LIST (disc list) âÂÂFOLDER&FILE LIST (folder and file list) 3 Select the desired file name (or folder name). The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Selecting files fr om the file name list on page 28. A vailable accessories En 72 Section 04
TV tuner Important This manual describes analog TV tuner operation. If you are already using a Pioneer analog TV tuner , such as the GEX-P5700TV , read this section. However , please read the important information below . ! P ioneer stopped selling analog TV tuners in the U.S. in 2006, and analog TV tuners are also no longer available in Canadian markets. P ioneer does not sell a digital TV tuner in the U.S. or in Canada. ! In the U.S., the switch from analog TV to digi- tal TV broadcasting is planned for F ebruar y 17, 2009. ! In Canada, the switch from analog TV to digi- tal TV broadcasting is planned for August 31, 2011. ! THIS MEANS THA T AF TER THE DA TES SPECI- FIED ABOVE (SUBJECT TO CHANGE), YOU CAN NO L ONGER USE THIS UNIT WITH AN ANAL OG TV TUNER TO WA TCH ALMOST ALL TV PROGRAMMING BROADCAST OVER- THE- AIR . Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5700TV), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. This section pro- vides information on TV operations with this unit, which differs from that described in the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. 1 Source icon 2 Band indicator 3 P reset number indicator 4 Channel indicator 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, TV1 or TV2. 4 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by press- ing c or d ( TRACK). 5 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P01 to P12 you can easily store up to 12 broadcast stations for later recall with the touch of a key . ! Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV bands, can be stored in memor y . A vailable accessories En 73 Section 04 A vailable accessories
1 T ouch LIST to display the preset list. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. 2 When you find a station that you want to store in memory , keep touching one of preset tuning keys P01 to P12 until the beep sounds. The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the station is recalled from memor y. # T o switch between P01 to P06 and P07 to P12 , touch PREV or NEXT . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning keys P01 to P12 . Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. 2 T ouch BSSM on the function menu to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSSM again. 3 T ouch ESC to return to the TV picture. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using P01 to P12 . Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustm ents Y ou can use this unit to control multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000), which is sold sepa- rately . ! Some functions may differ depending on the multi-channel processor connected to this unit. Important When a multi-channel processor and an optional DVD player are connected to this unit, be sure to use an optical cable (e.g. CD-AD600). 1 DSP display Shows the DSP function names. By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly . 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cross-over fre quency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch DSP MENU to display the DSP function names. The DSP function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. A vailable accessories En 74 Section 04
# T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , you cannot use audio functions. Also, equalizer cur ve setting, POSITION , AUTO EQ and AUTO T A will be can- celed. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , audio is outputted from front speakers only . # When selecting FM as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL . # When neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is se- lected in POSITION , you cannot switch to TIME ALIGNMENT . # When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting, you cannot switch to DOLBY PRO LOGIC II . 2 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live performance. ! The acoustics of different per formance en- vironments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors and ceilings. At a live per formance you hear music in three stages: direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections, or re- verberations. Those factors are programed into the SFC circuitr y to recreate the acous- tics of various per formance settings. 1 Press EQ and hold to switch to SFC function. # T o switch to equalizer function, press EQ and hold again. 2 Press EQ to select the desired SFC mode. MUSICAL (musical) âÂÂDRAMA (drama) â ACTION (actio n) âÂÂJAZZ (jazz) âÂÂHALL (hall) â CLUB (club) âÂÂOFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL , DRAMA or ACTION), we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II off . Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used in con- junction with the SFC, the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a pa- noramic sound that envelops you. 1 T ouch POSITION on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c / d / a/ b to select a listening po- sition. T ouch one of these, c/ d/ a/ b, to select a lis- tening position as listed in the table. Key Display Position c FRONT -L F ront seat left d FRONT -R F ront seat right a FRONT F ront seats b ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, touch the same key again. A vailable accessories En 75 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide the ideal listening environ- ment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER/BALANCE on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/r ear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :25 to REAR:25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR: 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT :25 to RIGHT :25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 T ouch SLA on the DSP function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 to âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (A V input) are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and sof test sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. ! When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL . 1 T ouch DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch d to turn the dynamic range con- trol on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , touch c. A vailable accessories En 76 Section 04
Using the down-mix function The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 1 T ouch DOWN MIX on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired level. ! Lo/Ro â Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. ! Lt/Rt â Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME/MUTE and DOLBY PRO LOGIC II . 1 T ouch DIGIT AL DIRECT on the DSP func- tion menu. 2 T ouch d to turn the direct control on. # T o turn direct control off , touch c. Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48 kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. ! When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker set- ting, you cannot switch to DOLBY PRO LOGIC II . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch DOLBY PRO LOGIC II. 3 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! MOVIE â The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA TRIX â The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! OFF â T urn Dolby P ro Logic II off ! MUSIC ADJUST â Adjust the Music mode # Y ou can operate MUSIC ADJUST only when MUSIC has been selected. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. ! P anorama ( P ANORAMA ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting âÂÂwraparound â ef- fect. ! Dimension ( DIMENSION ) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either to- wards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENTER WIDTH) al- lows center-channel sounds to be posi- tioned between the center speaker and the left/right speakers. It improves the left-cen- ter-right stage presentation for both the dri- ver and the front passenger . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch DOLBY PRO LOGIC II. 3 T ouch MUSIC and then touch MUSIC ADJUST. # Y ou can operate MUSIC ADJUST only when MUSIC has been selected. 4 T ouch a or b to select P ANORAMA (pa- norama). Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: P ANORAMA (panorama) âÂÂDIMENSION (di- mension) â CENTER WIDTH (center width) 5 T ouch d to turn the panorama control on. # T o turn the panorama control off , touch c. A vailable accessories En 77 Section 04 A vailable accessories
6 T ouch b to select DIMENSION and then touch c or d to adjust front/surround speaker balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 to âÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to surrounds. 7 T ouch b to select CENTER WIDTH and then touch c or d to adjust the center image. Each time you touch c or d it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 to 7 . 3 is the default and it âÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the left/right speakers. Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LARGE (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SMALL (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SMALL or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF . ! Set the front or rear speaker to LARGE if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch SPEAKER SETTING. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) âÂÂPHASE (subwoo- fer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON . 4 T ouch c or d to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each time you touch c or d selects the size in the following order: OFF (off) âÂÂSMALL (small) âÂÂLARGE (large) # Y ou cannot select OFF, when FRONT (front speakers) have been selected. # Y ou can select ON or OFF , when SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) has been selected. # Y ou can switch REVERSE (reverse phase) or NORMAL (normal phase), when PHASE (subwoo- fer setting) has been selected. Correcting the subwoofer â s phase If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn âÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer âÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch SPEAKER SETTING. 3 T ouch a or b to select SUB WOOFER (subwoofer). Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) âÂÂPHASE (subwoo- fer setting) 4 T ouch d to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch c. 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display. T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display . A vailable accessories En 78 Section 04
Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with P ro Logic turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE and no center speaker is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE . Adjusting the speaker output levels Speaker level can be adjusted finely by listen- ing to an audio output. First, use test tone to adjust the approximate speaker level, and then use this function to adjust finely . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch SPEAKER LEVEL. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT R (front speaker right) â REAR R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR L (rear speaker left) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set to OFF . (Re fer to Setting the speaker setting on the previous page.) 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. Note T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at TEST TONE . Both provide the same results. Selecting a cross-over frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo - fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SMALL, you can select a frequency , under which sounds are repro - duced through a LARGE speaker or subwoo- fer . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch CROSS OVER. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) 4 T ouch c or d to select cross-over fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cross-over frequencies in the following order: 63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz âÂÂ160Hz â 200Hz Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross- over frequency of the subwoofer âÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SMALL speaker H.P .F . (high- pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LARGE or OFF . Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the over- all balance right among the speakers. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch TEST TONE. A vailable accessories En 79 Section 04 A vailable accessories
3 T ouch ST ART to start the test tone out- put. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display. FRONT L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT R (front speaker right) â REAR R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR L (rear speaker left) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 5 to stop the test tone. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set to OFF . (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 78.) 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 5 T ouch STOP to stop the test tone out- put. Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their âÂÂab- solute â output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at SPEAKER LEVEL (speaker output level). Both provide the same results. Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT. 3 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the time alignment. ! INITIAL â Initial time alignment (factor y set- ting) ! AUTO T A â Time alignment created by auto T A and EQ. (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto- time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 82.) ! CUSTOM â Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! OFF â T urn the time alignment off ! ADJUSTMENT â Adjust the time alignment as desired # Y ou cannot select AUTO T A if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. # Y ou cannot select ADJUSTMENT when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . Adjusting the time alignment Y ou can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in CUSTOM. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT and then touch ADJUSTMENT. # Y ou cannot select ADJUSTMENT when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT R (front speaker right) â REAR R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR L (rear speaker left) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set to OFF . (Re fer to Setting the speaker setting on page 78.) A vailable accessories En 80 Section 04
4 T ouch c or d to adjust the distance be- tween the selected speaker and the listen- ing position. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the distance. 0.0inch to 200.0inch is displayed as the distance is increased or de- creased. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match the car âÂÂs interior acoustic charac ter- istics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves. Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal FLA T Flat CUSTOM1 Custom 1 CUSTOM2 Custom 2 SUPER BASS Super bass ! CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When FLA T is selected, no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂSUPER BASS Adjusting 3-band parametr ic equalizer Fo r CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and cen- ter equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a center frequency , an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! A CUSTOM2 cur ve can be created com- mon to all sources. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn âÂÂt easy . W e recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other spea kers. 1 T ouch NEXT twice on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ. 3 T ouch a or b to select the desired item. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: EQ (equalizer) âÂÂSP-SELECT (speakers) â BAND (bands) âÂÂFREQUENCY (center fre- quency) â LEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 4 T ouch d to select the equalizer . T ouch d repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂSUPER BASS 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch c or d until the desired speaker ap- pears in the display . REAR (rear speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speak- er) â FRONT (front speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set to OFF . (Re fer to Setting the speaker setting on page 78.) 6 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: A vailable accessories En 81 Section 04 A vailable accessories
LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) 7 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the center frequency of selected band. T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 40Hz âÂÂ50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz â 160Hzâ 200Hzâ 250Hzâ 315Hzâ 400Hzâ 500Hz âÂÂ630Hz âÂÂ800Hz âÂÂ1kHz âÂÂ1.25kHz â 1.6kHz âÂÂ2kHz âÂÂ2.5kHz âÂÂ3.15kHz âÂÂ4kHz â 5kHz âÂÂ6.3kHz âÂÂ8kHz âÂÂ10kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz 8 T ouch b and then touch c or d to ad- just the equalizer level. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the equalizer level. 12 to â 12 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. 9 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the desired Q factor . Each time you touch c or d switches between the following Q factor: NARROW (narrow) âÂÂWIDE (wide) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way . Note Y ou can select a center frequency for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc- tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on this page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 T ouch NEXT twice on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch AUTO EQ. # Y ou cannot use this function if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 3 T ouch d to turn the auto-equalizer on. # T o turn auto -equalizer off , touch c. Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) The auto-time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto-equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. A vailable accessories En 82 Section 04
Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp âÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. â When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . â When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 76.) â The equalizer cur ve switches to FLA T . (Refer to page 81.) â It will be adjusted automatically to high pass filter setting for front, center and rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto T A and EQ. 3 T ur n the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car âÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. # P ress SRC to turn the source on if this unit is turned off . A vailable accessories En 83 Section 04 A vailable accessories
4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 75. # If no position is selected before you start auto T A and EQ, FRONT -L is selected automatically . 5 Press SRC and hold until the unit turns off. 6 Press and hold EQ to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on the multi-channel pro- cessor . F or details concerning operation, refer to the multi-channel processor âÂÂs operation manual. 8 T ouch ST ART to start the auto T A and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speakers are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, touch STOP. # T o cancel auto T A and EQ on the way , touch BACK or ESC . 10 When auto T A and EQ is completed, Complete is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ error messages on page 89.) 11 T ouch ESC to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. 12 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or mal- function. A vailable accessories En 84 Section 04
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn âÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn âÂÂt operate. Leads and connecto rs are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once mor e that all connections are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install a fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocess or to oper- ate incorrectly. P ress RESET . (P age 15) Operation with the remote con- trol isn â t possible. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorrect. Switch to the correc t remote control mode. The remote control code is incor- rect. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. Batter y power is low . Load new batter y. Some operations are prohi bited with certain discs. Check by using another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty . Clean disc. (P age 90) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play. Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly . The unit is per forming still, slow mo - tion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The icon is displayed, and op- eration is not possibl e. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc â s organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback . After stopping playback once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olum e level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly . The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriate settin g for your display. (P age 39) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Additional Information En 85 Appendix Additional Information
Nothing is displayed. The touch pane l keys cannot be used. The rear view camera is not con- nected. CAMERA POLARITY is at incorrect setting. Connect a rear view camera. P ress and hold VO LUME/MUTE to return to the source display and then select the correct setting for CAMERA POLARITY . (Page 47) Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 9, P age 100) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (P age 40) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number . (P age 40) Y ou have forgotten your code num- ber . T ouch C 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 40) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings. Y ou cannot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subti tle language settings selected in DVD SETUP . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in DVD SETUP . Switching to a sel ected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in DVD SETUP is not recorded on the disc. Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cannot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes reco rded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angles when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremel y unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibitin g copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizon tal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. Additional Information En 86 Appendix
Problems during iPod playback Symptom Cause Action iP od doesn âÂÂt operate correctly . Cables are incorrectly connected. Disconnect the cable from iP od. Once iPod main menu is displayed, connect the cable again. Reset the iP od. The iP od version is old. Update the iPod version. Problems during multi-channel processor connection Symptom Cause Action (See) No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Optical cables are not connected correctly . Connect the cables correctly . Even if multi-channel audio is selected, 2-channel audio is out- put. Digital output setting is set to Line- ar PCM . Normally , set the digital output setting to STREAM . (P age 41) Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to have the error message recorded. Built-in DVD player Message Cause Action DIFFERENT REGION DISC (R ERROR) The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . ERROR-02-XX Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. Electrical or me chanical P ress RESET . NON-PLA Y ABLE DISC (NON- PLA Y) This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play . The inserted disc does not contain any files that can be played ba ck Replace disc. PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM Replace disc. SKIPPED The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protec ted by DRM Replace disc. TEMP The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit âÂÂs tempera ture returns to within normal operating limits. Additional Information En 87 Appendix Additional Information
USB audio player/USB memory Message Cause Action NO AUDIO No songs T ransfer the audio files to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y and connect. USB memor y with security enabled is connected F ollow the USB memor y instructions to dis- able the security. NO DEVICE The USB storage device is not con- nected to the USB port of this unit. Connect a compatible USB storage device. SKIPPED The connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y contains WMA files that are protec ted by Windows Media ⢠DRM 9/10 Play an audio file no t prot ected by Windows Media DRM 9/10. PROTECT All the files on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y are protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10 T ransfer audio files not protec ted by Windows Media DRM 9/10 to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y and connect. N/A USB The USB device connected to is not supported by this unit. Connect a USB portable audio player or USB memor y that is USB Mass Storage Class compliant. CHECK USB The USB connecto r or USB cable is short-circuited. Confirm that the USB connector or USB cable is not caught in something or da- maged. The connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y consumes more than 500 mA (maxim um allow- able current). Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memor y and do not use it. T urn the igni- tion switch to OF F , then to ACC or ON and then connect the compliant USB portable audio player/USB memor y. ERROR-19 Communication failure P er form one of the following operations. â T urn the ignition switch OFF and back ON. â Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memor y . â Change to a different source. Then, return to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y . ERROR-23 USB device is not formatted with F A T16 or FA T32 USB device should be formatted with F A T16 or FA T32. iPod Message Cause Action ERROR-11 Communication failure Disconnect the cable from iP od. Once iPod main menu is displayed, connect the cable again. Reset the iP od. ERROR-21 Old version of iP od Update the iPod version. ERROR-30 iP od failure Reset the iP od. STOP No songs in the current list Select a list that contains the songs. No songs T ransfer the songs to iPod. Additional Information En 88 Appendix
iP od is not charged but operate s correctly Check if the connection cable for iP od shorted out (e.g., not caught in metal ob- jects). After checking, turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON or disconnect the iP od and connect again. The connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y consumes more than 500 mA (maxim um allow- able current). Check if the connection cable for iP od shorted out (e.g., not caught in metal ob- jects). After checking, turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON or disconnect the iP od and connect again. Error has occurr ed when connect- ing the iPod to this unit Reconnect the iP od. T urn the ignition switch to OFF , then to ACC or ON. Update the iPod version. Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action Error . Please check MIC. Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Error . Please check front SP . , Error . Please check FL SP . , Error . Please check FR SP . , Error . Please check center SP . , Error . Please check rear SP . , Error . Please check RL SP . , Error . Please check RR SP . , Error . Please check subwoofer The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the mic rophone corr ectly . Error . Please check noise. The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the mic rophone corr ectly . Additional Information En 89 Appendix Additional Information
Handling guideline of discs and player ! Use only conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs. ! Use 12-cm or 8-cm disc. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed in the following section. Refer to Playable discs on page 9. ! Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may da- mage the player . ! Do not touch the recorded sur face of the discs. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir- onments including under direct sunlight. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! Condensation may temporarily impair the player â s per formance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about one hour . Also, wipe any dump discs with a soft cloth. ! Playback of discs may not be possible be- cause of disc characteristics, disc format, recorded application, playback environ- ment, storage conditions, and so on. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. ! Read the precautions for discs before using them. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! It is not possible to play back DVD -ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. DVD-R/DVD-RW discs ! Unfinalized DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded with the V ideo format (video mode) cannot be played back. ! DVD-R/-RW discs which have been re- corded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) cannot be played back. ! F or more information about recording mode, please contact manufacture of DVD recorder or application. A VCHD recorded discs ! This unit is not compa tible with discs re- corded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc may not be ejected. CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (F or details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) Additional Information En 90 Appendix
! Playback of CD-R/CD -RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto- rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD -RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! Read the precautions with CD -R/CD-RW discs before using them. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two-sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. ! F requent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback pro- blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed infor- mation about Dual Discs. Compressed au dio files on the disc ! Depending on the version of Windows Media ⢠Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data. ! ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player . ! Multi-session playback is possible. ! Compressed audio files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! Only 64 characters from the beginning can be displayed as a file name (including the extension such as .wma or .mp3) or a folder name. ! F older selection sequence or other opera- tion may be altered depending on the en- coding or writing sof tware. ! Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording, compressed audio discs play with a short pause between songs. ! File extensions such as .wma, .mp3 or .m4a must be used properly . Example of a hierarchy : Folder : Compressed audio file 1 2 3 4 5 6 L e v e l 1 L e v e l 2 L e v e l 3 L e v e l 4 ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on one disc. Additional Information En 91 Appendix Additional Information
Compressed audio compatibility WMA ! Compatible format: WMA encoded by Windows Media Player ! Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Windows Media Audio 9 P rofessional, Loss- less, V oice: No MP3 ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (8 kHz to 48 kHz for emphasis) ! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 (ID3 tag V ersion 2.x is given priority than V ersion 1.x.) ! M3u playlist: No ! MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: No AAC ! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iT unes ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) ! VBR : No ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz ! Apple Lossless: No USB audio player/USB memory USB audio player/USB memory compatibility ! USB version: 2.0, 1.1 and 1.0 ! USB data transfer rate: full speed ! USB Class: MSC (Mass Storage Class) de- vice ! P rotocol: bulk ! Minimum amount of memor y : 250 MB ! Maximum amount of memor y : 250 GB ! File system: F A T32 and F A T16 ! Supply current: 500 mA Notes ! P artitioned USB memor y is not compatible with this unit. ! Depending on the kind of USB portable audio player/USB memory you use, this unit may not recognize the USB audio player/USB memor y or audio files may not be played back properly . ! This unit can play back files in the USB porta- ble audio player/USB memory that is USB Mass Storage Class. However , copyright pro- tected files that are stored in above-mentioned USB devices cannot be played back. ! Y ou cannot connect a USB portable audio player/USB memory to this unit via a USB hub. USB audio player/USB memory ! Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memor y in direct sunlight for extended amounts of time. Extended expo- sure to direct sunlight can result in USB portable audio player/USB memor y mal- function due to the resul ting high tempera- ture. ! Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memor y in high temperature. ! Firmly secure the USB portable audio player/USB memor y when driving. Do not let the USB portable audio player/USB memor y fall onto the floor , where it may be- come jammed under the brake or accelera- tor pedal. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data. ! Depending on the USB devices connected to this unit, it may generate noise in the radio. ! Only 22 characters from the beginning can be displayed as a file name (including the extension) or a folder name when USB por- table audio player/USB memor y is selected as a source. ! The text information of some audio files may not be correctly displayed. ! File extensions must be used properly . ! Up to 15 000 files on a USB portable audio player/USB memor y can be played back. ! Up to 500 folders on a USB portable audio player/USB memor y can be played back. Additional Information En 92 Appendix
! Up to eight tiers director y on a USB porta- ble audio player/USB memor y can be played back. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files on a USB portable audio player/USB memor y with numerous folder hierarchies. ! Do not connect anything other than the USB portable audio player/USB memor y . ! Operations may var y depending on the kind of USB audio player and a USB mem- or y . The sequence of audio files on USB memory F or USB portable audio players, the sequence is different from that of USB memor y and de- pends on the player . Example of a hierarchy : Folder : Compressed audio file 1 2 3 4 5 6 L e v e l 1 L e v e l 2 L e v e l 3 L e v e l 4 ! 01 to 05 represent assigned folder num- bers. 1 to 6 represent the playback se- quence. The user cannot assign folder numbers and specif y the playback se- quence with this unit. ! Playback sequence of the audio file is the same as recorded sequence in the USB de- vice. ! T o specify the playback sequence, the fol- lowing method is recommended. 1 Create the file name including numbers that specify the playback sequence (e.g., 001xxx.mp3 and 099yyy .mp3). 2 P ut those files into a folder . 3 Record the folder containing files into the USB device. However , depending on the system environ- ment, you cannot specify the file playback sequence. Compressed audio compatibility WMA ! Compatible format: WMA encoded by Windows Media Player ! Bit rate: 48 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), 48 kbps to 384 kbps (VBR) ! Sampling frequency: 32 kHz to 48 kHz ! Windows Media Audio 9 P rofessional, Loss- less, V oice: No MP3 ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps ! Sampling frequency: 16 kHz to 48 kHz (32, 44.1, 48 kHz for emphasis) ! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 (ID3 tag V ersion 2.x is given priority than Version 1.x.) ! M3u playlist: No ! MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: No AAC ! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iT unes ! Sampling frequency: 11.025 kHz to 48 kHz ! T ransmission rate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps ! Apple Lossless: No WA V ! Compatible format: Linear PCM (LPCM), MS ADPCM ! Quantization bits: 8 and 16 (LPCM), 4 (MS ADPCM) ! Sampling frequency: 16 kHz to 48 kHz (LPCM), 22.05 kHz to 44.1 kHz (MS AD - PCM) Additional Information En 93 Appendix Additional Information
DivX video files ! Depending on the file information composi- tion such as the number of audio stream, there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs. ! Some special operation may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files. ! DivX files downloaded only from DivX part- ner site are guarantee of proper operation. Unauthorized DivX file may not operate properly . ! DRM rental file cannot be operated until starting playing back. ! This unit corresponds to a DivX file display up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also, search operation beyond this time limit is prohibited. ! If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback is stopped on the way. ! DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of this unit to DivX VOD provider . About ID code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD re- gistration code on page 41. ! File extensions such as .avi or .divx must be used properly. ! F or more details about DivX, visit the follow- ing site: http://www .divx.com/ DivX compatibility ! Compatible format: DivX video format im- plemented in relation to DivX standards ! DivX Ultra format: No ! DivX files without video data: No ! Compatible audio codec: MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital ! LPCM: No ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Compatible external subtitle file extension: .srt About handling the iPod CAUTION ! P ioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the iP od even if that data is lost while using this unit. ! Do not leave the iP od in direct sunlight for ex- tended amounts of time. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in iP od malfunc- tion due to the resulting high temperature. ! Do not leave the iP od in a high temperature. ! Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not let the iP od fall onto the floor , where it may be- come jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. F or details, refer to the iP od âÂÂs manuals. About iPod settings ! Y ou cannot operate the iP od Equalizer on P ioneer products. W e recommend that you set the iP od Equalizer to off , before con- necting to this unit. ! Y ou cannot set Repeat to off on the iP od when using this unit. Even if you set Repeat to off on the iP od, Repeat is automatically changed to All when connecting the iP od to this unit. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station . Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in fire, electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display , turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station . Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent da- mage to the system. Additional Information En 94 Appendix
! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station for internal inspec- tion, adjustments, or repairs. Handling the display ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come very hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. When not using this unit, close the display and avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. ! The display should be used within the tem- perature ranges shown below . Storage temperature range: -4 ðF to 176 ðF At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range, the display may not operate normally . ! The LCD screen is exposed in order to in- crease its visibility within the vehicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is opened. Also, do not attempt to carr y out angle adjustment, or open/close the display by hand. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen forcefully as this may scratch it. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. If an object gets between the display and main body , the display may stop working. ! Be careful of fingers, long hair , and loose articles of clothing which could possibly get caught between the display and the main body and cause serious injur y . Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air con- ditioner when it is opened, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen, and cool air from the cool- er may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage. Also, if the display is cooled down by the cooler , the screen may become dark, or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used in- side the display may be shortened. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display . ! At low temperatures, the LCD screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display , first turn the system power off , then wipe with a soft dr y cloth. ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. â The fluorescent tube should last for ap- proximately 10 000 hours, depending on operating conditions. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the ser vice life of the fluorescent tube.) Additional Information En 95 Appendix Additional Information
â When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life, the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. If this happens, consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Additional Information En 96 Appendix
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortugues e (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo- Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 012 5 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T on ga (to) , 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wo l o f ( w o ) , 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om ), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu ), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl) , 1612 Additional Information En 97 Appendix Additional Information
T erms AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Aspect ratio This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. Wi th DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com- pressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for down- load online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to -use tools from DivX.com. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video, including DivX 6. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-band- width output channels from two-channel sources. This new technology enables a dis- crete 5-channel playback with 2 front chan- nels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. Dynamic range control Dolby Digital has a function for compressing the difference between the loudest and softest sounds: Dynamic range control. This control ensures sounds with an increased dynamic range are heard clearly even at low volume le- vels. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist âÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD-ROM folders and files. F or the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the â _â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). Additional Information En 98 Appendix
Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark âÂÂ. â and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the â WINAMP â soft- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Orga nization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult- or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit âÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Additional Information En 99 Appendix Additional Information
Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive sof tware and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality . WMA WMA is short for Wi ndows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corporation . WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Additional Information En 100 Appendix
Specifications General Po w e r s o u r c e ............................. 14.4 V DC (10.8 V to 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system ................... N e g ative type Max. current consu mption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 8 0 m m à5 0 m m à1 6 5 mm (7-1/8 in. à2 in. à6-1/2 in.) N o s e ........................... 1 8 8 m m à5 8 m m à3 3 m m (7-3/8 in.à2-1/4 in.à1-1/4 in.) D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 m m à5 0 m m à1 6 5 mm (7 in.à2 in.à6-1/2 in.) N o s e ........................... 1 7 0 m m à4 6 m m à2 8 m m (6-3/4 in.à1-3/4 in.à1-1/8 in.) We i g h t .......................................... 2 . 4 k g (5.3 lbs) Display Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 . 0 i n c h w i d e / 1 6 : 9 (effective display area: 154 à87 mm) P ixels ............................................. 3 3 6 9 6 0 ( 1 4 4 0 à234) D i s p l a y m e t h o d ........................ T F T a c t i v e m a t r i x , t r a n s m i s - sive type Color system .............................. N T S C Durable temperature ran ge (power off) ..................................................... - 4 ð F t o 1 7 6 ð F Angle adjustment .................... 5 0 ð t o 110ð (initial settings: 90ð) Audio Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoofer) Continuous power output . .. 22 W à4 (50 Hz to 15 000 Hz, 5 % THD, 4 W load, both channels driven) Load impedance ...................... 4 W to 8 W ÃÂ4 4 W to 8 W ÃÂ2 2 W ÃÂ1 Pr e o u t m a x o u t p u t l e v e l ....... 4 . 0 V Equalizer (3-Band P arametric Equalizer): Low Fr e q u e n c y ................ 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/ 0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ 1 2 d B Mid Fr e q u e n c y ................ 200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/ 0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ 1 2 d B High Fr e q u e n c y ................ 3.15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/ 0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ 1 2 d B HPF : Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz S l o p e .................................... â 12 dB/oct Subwoofer (mono): Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz S l o p e .................................... â 18 dB/oct G a i n ...................................... 6 d B t o â 24 dB Phase .................................. N o r m al/Reverse Bass boost: G a i n ...................................... 1 2 d B t o 0 d B DVD Player System .......................................... D V D v i d e o , V i d e o C D , C D , WMA, MP3, AAC, DivX sys- tem U s a b l e d i s c s .............................. D V D v i d e o , V i d e o C D , C D , CD-R/RW , DVD -R/RW/RDL Region number ........................ 1 Fr e q u e n c y r e s p o n s e ............... 5 H z t o 4 4 0 0 0 H z ( w i t h DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 9 6 d B ( 1 k H z ) ( I H F - A n e t - work) (RCA level) Output level: V i d e o .................................... 1 . 0 V p -p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t e r e o ) M P 3 d e c o d i n g f o r m a t ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding forma t ......... V e r . 7 , 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding forma t ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iT unes en- coded only) (.m4a) (V er . 8.0 and earlier) DivX decoding forma t ............ Home Theater Ver . 3, 4, 5.2 (.avi, .divx) USB USB standard specification ..................................................... U S B 2 . 0 f u l l s p e e d Maximum current supply .... 5 0 0 m A U S B C l a s s ................................... M S C ( M a s s S torage Class) File system .................................. FAT16, F A T32 M P 3 d e c o d i n g f o r m a t ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 Additional Information En 101 Appendix Additional Information
WMA decoding forma t ......... V e r . 7 , 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding forma t ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iT unes en- coded only) (.m4a) (V er . 8.0 and earlier) WAV signal format .................. L i n e a r P C M & M S A D P C M (Non-compressed) FM tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 2 d B ( I H F - A n e t w o r k ) AM tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 5 3 0 k H z t o 1 7 1 0 k H z ( 1 0 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 2 5 õ V ( S / N : 2 0 d B ) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 2 d B ( I H F - A n e t w o r k ) CEA2006 Specifications Po w e r o u t p u t ............................. 1 4 W R M S à4 C h annels (4 W and ⦠1 % THD N) S / N r a t i o ....................................... 9 1 d B A (reference: 1 W into 4 W) Note Specifications and the design are subject to mod- ifications without notice due to improvements. Additional Information En 102 Appendix
A Angle icon ................................................. .26, .39 Aspect ratio .............................................. .39, .98 Audio language ........................................ .26, .38 B Bookmark ........................................................ .25 Brightness ....................................................... .45 C Chapter ............................................................ .98 Code number .................................................. .40 Color ................................................................ .45 Contrast ........................................................... .45 D DivX .................................................................. .98 DivX Certified .................................................. .98 Dolby Digital ............................................. .11, .98 Dolby P ro Logic II .......................................... .98 DTS ............................................................ .11, .98 Dynamic range control ................................. .98 H Hue .................................................................. .45 L Language code chart .................................... .97 Linear PCM (LPCM) ....................................... .99 M Menu language .............................................. .39 MPEG ............................................................... .99 Multi-angle ................................................ .26, .99 Multi-audio ............................. ................... .26, .99 Multi-subtitle ............................................. .26, .99 O Optical digital output/input .......................... .99 P P arental lock ............................................. .40, .99 PBC (playback control) ................................. .22 Playback control (PBC) ............................... .100 R Region number ........................................ .9, .100 S Subtitle language ..................................... .26, .38 T Title ................................................................ .100 TV aspect ................................ ......................... .39 V Video CD ........................................................... .9 W Wide screen mode ......................................... .45 Index En 103
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU T OKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA ) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique TEL: (0) 3/570.05 .11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-755 5 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victor ia 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allsta te Parkwa y , Markham, Ontar io L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-2 83-5901 TEL: 905-479-441 1 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0 å  é è¡ 份 æÂ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ 總 å ¬ å¸ ï¼ å°å 帠丠山å 路 亠段 44 èÂÂ13 樠é» 話 ï¼ (02) 2521-3588 å  é é» å @馠港@æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å´ 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 ï¼ (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright é 2008 âÂÂ2009 by Pi oneer Corporation. All rights reser v ed. Printed in Thailand < CRB2972-B/N >U C <KNAZX> <09B00000>
Thank you for purchasing this PIONEER product. Please read through this manual before usi ng the product for the firs t time, to en- sure proper use. After reading, please k eep the manual in a safe and accessible place for futur e reference . Be sure to read this ! Playable discs 9 ! DVD video disc region numbers 9 ! When an operation is prohibited 14 Precautions IMPORT ANT SAFEGUARDS 6 T o ensure safe driving 6 â P arking brake interlock 7 â When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT 7 â When using a rear view camera 7 T o avoid batter y exhaustion 7 Before Y ou Start Information to User 8 F or Canadian model 8 About this unit 8 â Playable discs 9 â DVD video disc region numbers 9 About this manual 10 After-sales ser vice for P ioneer products 10 Visit our website 10 F eatures 11 â About WMA 12 â About MP3 12 â About AAC 12 â About DivX 13 â About the SA T RADIO READY mark 13 T o protect the LCD screen 13 F or viewing the LCD comfortably 13 â Changing the wide screen size 13 â Changing the picture adjustment 14 What the marks on DVDs indicate 14 â When an operation is prohibited 14 P rotecting your unit from theft 14 â Removing the front panel 14 â Attaching the front panel 14 Resetting the micropro cessor 15 F eature demo mode 15 Operating this unit What âÂÂs what 16 â Head unit 16 â Optional remote control 16 Basic Operations 17 â P ower ON/OFF 17 â Selecting a source 17 â Adjusting the volume 18 â T ouch panel key basic operation 18 â Opening and closing the LCD panel 19 Radio 20 â Basic Operations 20 â Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 21 â Introduction to advanced operations 21 â Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 21 â T uning in strong signals 21 Built-in DVD player 22 â Basic Operations 22 â Basic playback controls 23 â Switching the media file type 23 â Operating the DVD menu 23 â PBC playback 24 â Playing DivXî VOD content 24 â Skipping back or for ward to another title 24 â CM skip/CM back 25 â Resume playback (Bookma rk) 25 â Searching for the part you want to play 25 â Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) 26 â Changing the subtitle language during playback (Multi-subtitle) 26 â Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) 26 Contents En 2
â F rame-by-frame playback 27 â Slow motion playback 27 â Return to the specified scene 27 â Automatic playback of DVDs 27 â T ext information 27 â Selecting tracks from the track list 28 â Selecting files from the file name list 28 â Introduction to advanced operations 28 â Repeating play 28 â Playing tracks in random order 29 â Scanning tracks or folders 29 â Selecting audio output 29 â Using compression 30 Playing songs on iP od 30 â Basic Operations 30 â Playing video 31 â Browsing for a song/video 31 â Displaying text information on iP od 32 â Repeating play 32 â Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) 32 â Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle all) 32 â Operating this unitâ s iP od function from your iP od 32 â P ausing a song 33 â Selecting songs from album list of currently playing artist 33 â Changing audiobook speed 33 Playing songs on USB portable audio player/ USB memory 33 â Basic Operations 33 â P ausing compressed audio playback 34 â Introduction to advanced operations 34 â Displaying text information of an audio file 34 â Selecting files from the file name list 34 Audio Adjustments 35 â Introduction of audio adjustments 35 â Using balance adjustment 35 â Using the equalizer 35 â Adjusting loudness 36 â Using subwoofer output 36 â Boosting the bass 37 â Using the high pass filter 37 â Adjusting source levels 37 Setting up the DVD player 38 â Introduction of DVD setup adjustments 38 â Setting the subtitle language 38 â Setting the audio language 38 â Setting the menu language 39 â Switching the assist subtitle on or off 39 â Setting the angle icon display 39 â Setting the aspect ratio 39 â Setting the parental lock 40 â Setting the DivX subtitle file 41 â Displaying your DivXî VOD registration code 41 â Setting for digital output 41 Initial Settings 42 â Adjusting initial settings 42 â Switching the auxiliar y setting 42 â Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller 42 â Changing languages for CAUTION 43 â Switching the sound muting/ attenuation 43 â Switching the warning tone 43 â Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection 43 â Correcting distorted sound 44 â Resetting the audio functions 44 Other F unctions 45 En 3 Contents
â Introduction of system adjustments 45 â Changing the wide screen mode 45 â Changing the picture adjustment 45 â Selecting the background display 46 â Setting the AV input 46 â Setting the clock 47 â Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) 47 â Adjusting the LCD panel slide position 47 â Setting the automatic open function 48 â Switching the iP od charge setting 48 â Selecting the OSD color 48 â Selecting the illumination color 48 â Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch P anel Calibration) 49 â Using the AUX source 49 â Using the external unit 50 â Using the PGM button 51 Available accessories XM tuner 52 â Basic Operations 52 â Storing and recalling broadcast stations 52 â Switching the XM channel select mode 53 â Selecting an XM channel directly 53 â Using the MyMix function 53 â Displaying the Radio ID 54 â Switching the XM display 55 SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner 55 â Basic Operations 55 â Storing and recalling broadcast stations 56 â Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode 56 â Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly 57 â Using the MyMix function 57 â Using the Game Alert function 58 â Displaying the Radio ID 59 â Switching the SIRIUS display 59 â Using Instant Replay function 59 Bluetooth Audio 60 â Basic Operations 60 â P ausing playback 61 â Introduction to advanced operations 61 â Connecting a Bluetooth audio player 61 â Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player 61 â Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 61 Bluetooth T elephone 62 â Basic Operations 62 â Setting up for hands-free phoning 63 â Making a phone call 63 â T aking a phone call 63 â Introduction to advanced operations 64 â Connecting a cellular phone 64 â Disconnecting a cellular phone 64 â Registering a connected cellular phone 65 â Deleting a registered phone 65 â Connecting to a registered cellular phone 65 â Using the phone book 65 â Using the call histor y 67 â Using preset numbers 67 â Making a call by entering phone number 68 â Clearing memory 68 â Setting automatic answering 68 â Setting automatic rejecting 68 â Switching the ring tone 68 â Echo canceling and noise reduction 69 Contents En 4
â Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address 69 Multi-CD Player 69 â Basic Operations 69 â Selecting a disc 70 â P ausing CD playback 70 â Introduction to advanced operations 70 â Using CD TEXT functions 70 DVD Player 71 â Basic Operations 71 â Selecting a disc 71 â Selecting a folder 71 â P ausing disc playback 71 â Introduction to advanced operations 72 TV tuner 73 â Basic Operations 73 â Storing and recalling broadcast stations 73 â Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 74 Digital Signal P rocessor 74 â Introduction of DSP adjustments 74 â Using the sound field control 75 â Using the position selector 75 â Using balance adjustment 76 â Adjusting source levels 76 â Using the dynamic range control 76 â Using the down-mix function 77 â Using the direct control 77 â Using the Dolby P ro Logic II 77 â Setting the speaker setting 78 â Adjusting the speaker output levels 79 â Selecting a cross-over frequency 79 â Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 79 â Using the time alignment 80 â Using the equalizer 81 â Using the auto-equalizer 82 â Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) 82 Additional Infor mation T roubleshooting 85 Error messages 87 Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages 89 Handling guideline of discs and player 90 DVD discs 90 DVD-R/DVD-RW discs 90 AVCHD recorded discs 90 CD-R/CD-RW discs 90 Dual Discs 91 Compressed audio files on the disc 91 â Example of a hierarchy 91 â Compressed audio compatibility 92 USB audio player/USB memor y 92 â USB audio player/USB memor y compatibility 92 â USB audio player/USB memor y 92 â Compressed audio compatibility 93 DivX video files 94 â DivX compatibility 94 About handling the iP od 94 â About iP od settings 94 Using the display correctly 94 â Handling the display 95 â Liquid cr ystal display (LCD) screen 95 â Keeping the display in good condition 95 â Small fluorescent tube 95 Language code chart for DVD 97 T erms 98 Specifications 101 Index 103 En 5 Contents
IMPORT ANT SA FEGUARDS Please read all of these instructions regarding your display and retain them for future refer- ence. 1 Read this manual fully and carefully be- fore operating your display . 2 Keep this manual handy as a refer ence for operating procedur es and safety informa- tion. 3 Pay close attention to all warnings in this manual and follow the instructions care- fully . 4 Do not allow other persons to use this sys- tem until they have read and understoo d the operating instructions. 5 Do not install the display where it may (i) obstruct the driver âÂÂs vision, (ii) impair the performance of any of the vehicle âÂÂs oper- ating systems or safety features, includ- ing air bags, hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver âÂÂs ability to safely oper- ate the vehicle. 6 Do not operate this display if doing so in any way will divert your attention from the safe operation of your vehicle. Always observe safe driving rules and follow all existing traffic regulations. If you experi- ence difficulty in operating the system or reading the display , park your vehicle in a safe location and make necessary adjust- ments. 7 Please remember to wear your seat belt at all times while operating your vehicle. If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can be considerably more severe if your seat belt is not properly buckled. 8 Never use headphones while driving. 9 T o promote safety , certain functions are disabled unless the parking brake is on, and the vehicle is not in motion. 10 Never set the volume of your display so high that you cannot hear outside traffic and emergency vehicles. WARNING ! Do not attempt to install or service your display by yourself . Installation or servi- cing of the display by persons without training and experience in electronic equipment and automotive accessories may be dangerous and could expose you to the risk of electric shock or other hazards. T o ensure safe driving WARNING ! LIGHT GREEN LEAD A T POWER CON- NECTOR IS DESIGNED TO DETECT P ARKED ST A TUS AND MUST BE CON- NECTED TO THE POWER SUPPL Y SIDE OF THE P ARKING BRAKE SWIT CH. IM- PROPER CONNECTION OR USE OF THIS LEAD MA Y VIOLA TE APPLICABLE LAW AND MA Y RESUL T IN SERIOUS IN- JURY OR DAMAGE. ! T o avoid the risk of damage and injur y and the potential violation of applicable laws, this unit is not for use with a video screen that is visible to the driver . ! T o avoid the risk of accident and the potential violation of applicable laws, the front DVD or TV (sold separately) feature should never be used while the vehicle is being driven. Also , rear displays should not be in a location where they are visibly distracting to the driver . ! In some countries or states the viewing of images on a display inside a vehicle even by persons other than the driver may be illegal. Where such regulations apply , they must be obeyed and this unit âÂÂs DVD features should not be used. When you attempt to watch a DVD, Video CD or TV while driving, the warning Viewing of front seat video sour ce while driving is strictly prohibited. will appear on the front display . Precautions En 6 Section 01
T o watch a DVD, Video CD or TV on the front display , park your vehicle in a safe place and apply the parking brake. Parking brake interlock Certain functions (DVD/TV viewing and certain touch panel keys) offered by this unit could be dangerous and/or unlawful if used while driv- ing. T o prevent such functions from being used while the vehicle is in motion, there is an interlock system that senses when the parking brake is set. If you attempt to use the functions described above while driving, they will be- come disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place, and (1) apply the parking brake, (2) release the parking brake, and then (3) apply the parking brake again. Please keep the brake pedal pushed down before releasing the parking brake. When using a display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT This unit âÂÂs REAR MONITOR OUTPUT is for connection of a display to enable passengers in the rear seats to watch the DVD or TV . WARNING NEVER install the rear display in a location that enables the driver to watch the DVD or TV while driving. When using a rear view camera With an optional rear view camera, you are able to use this unit as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or backing into a tight parking spot. WARNING ! SCREEN IMAGE MA Y APPEAR RE- VERSED. ! USE INPUT ONL Y FOR REVERSE OR MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA. OTHER USE MA Y RESUL T IN INJURY OR DAMAGE. CAUTION ! The rear view camera function is to be used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or while backing up. Do not use for entertainment pur- poses. ! Please note that the edges of the rear view camera images may differ slightly according to whether full screen images are displayed when backing up, and whether the images are used for checking the rear when the vehicle is moving forward. T o avoid battery exhaustion Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this unit. Using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. ! When no power is supplied to this unit be- cause of a replacement of the vehicle bat- ter y or for some similar reason, the microcomputer of this unit is returned to its initial condition. W e recommend that you transcribe the audio adjustment data. WARNING Do not use with vehicles that do not feature an ACC position. Precautions En 7 Section 01 Precautions
Information to User Alteration or modifications carried out without appropriate authorization may invalidate the user âÂÂs right to operate the equipment. For Canadian model This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. About this unit The tuner frequencies on this unit are allo- cated for use in North America. Use in other areas may result in poor reception. WARNING Handling the cord on this product or cords asso- ciated with accessories sold with the product may expose you to chemicals listed on proposi- tion 65 known to the State of California and other governmental entities to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. W ash hands after handling . Before Y ou Start En 8 Section 02
CA UTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUSTMENT OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCEDURES O THER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MA Y RESUL T IN HAZARDOUS RADIA TION EXPOSURE. CA UTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD . CAUTION ! Do not allow this unit to come into contact with liquids. Electrical shock could result. Also, damage to this unit, smoke, and over- heating could result from contact with liquids. ! Keep this manual handy as a reference for op- erating procedures and precautions. ! Always keep the volume low enough so that you can hear sounds from outside the vehicle. ! P rotect this unit from moisture. ! If the batter y is disconnected or discharged, the preset memory will be erased and must be reprogrammed. Important (Serial number) The serial number is located on the bottom of this unit. F or your own security and convenience, be sure to record this number on the enclosed warranty card. Playable discs DVD, Video CD and CD discs that display the logos shown below can be played back on this player . DVD video Video CD CD Notes ! is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo Licensing Corporation . ! This player can only play back discs bearing the marks shown above. DVD video disc r egion numbers DVD video discs that have incompatible region numbers cannot be played on this player . The region number of the player can be found on the bottom of this unit and in this manual (refer to Specifications on page 101). Before Y ou Start En 9 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
The illustration below shows the regions and corresponding region numbers. About this manual This unit features a number of sophisticated functions ensuring superior reception and op- eration. All the functions have been designed for the easiest possible use, but many are not self-explanator y . This operation manual will help you benefit fully from this unit âÂÂs potential and to maximize your listening enjoyment. W e recommend that you familiarize yourself with the functions and their operation by read- ing through the manual before you begin using this unit. It is especially important that you read and obser ve WARNINGs and CAU- TION s in this manual. After -sales service for Pioneer products Please contact the dealer or distributor from where you purchased this unit for after-sales ser vice (including warranty conditions) or any other informatio n. In case the necessar y infor- mation is not available, please contact the companies listed below: Please do not ship your unit to the companies at the addresses listed below for repair without advance contact. U.S.A. P ioneer Electronics (USA) Inc. CUSTOMER SUPPORT DIVISION P .O . Box 1760 Long Beach, CA 90801-1760 800-421-1404 CANADA P ioneer Electronics of Canada, Inc. CUSTOMER SA TISF ACTION DEP ARTMENT 300 Allstate P arkway Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2 1-877-283-5901 905-479-4411 F or warranty information please see the Lim- ited Warranty sheet included with this unit. Visit our website Visit us at the following site: http://www .pioneerelectronics.com 1 Register your product. W e will keep the details of your purchase on file to help you refer to this information in the event of an insurance claim such as loss or theft. 2 Receive updates on the latest products and technologies. 3 Download owner âÂÂs manuals, order product catalogues, research new products, and much more. 4 Y our feedback is important in our continual ef- fort to design and build the most advanced, consumer-focused product in the industr y . Serial number Before Y ou Start En 10 Section 02
Features T ouch panel key operation It is possible to operate this unit by using touch panel key . DVD-R/RW compatibility It is possible to play back DVD-R/RW discs re- corded with the video format. (Refer to DVD-R/ DVD-RW discs on page 90.) Video CDs featuring PBC compatibility It is possible to play back Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control). WMA, MP3 and AAC compatibility Refer to Compressed audio compatibility on page 92. DivX î video compatibility Refer to DivX compatibility on page 94. Dolby Digital/DTS compatibility When using this unit with a P ioneer multi- channel processor , you can enjoy the atmo - sphere and excitement provided by DVD movie and music software featuring 5.1 channel re- cordings. ! Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories . Dolby , Pro Logic, and the dou- ble-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories . ! Manufactured under license under U.S. P a- tent #: 5,451,942 & other U.S. and world- wide patents issued & pending. DTS and DTS Digital Out are registered trademarks and the DTS logos and Symbol are trade- marks of DTS, Inc. é 1996-2007 DTS, Inc. All Rights Reser ved. Portable audio player compatibility ! Make inquiries to the manufacturer about your USB portable audio player/USB mem- or y . This unit corresponds to the following. â USB MSC (Mass Storage Class) compliant portable audio player and memory â WMA, MP3, AAC and W AV file playback F or details about the compatibility , refer to Compressed audio compatibility on page 93. iPhone iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc. iT unes iT unes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. iPod iP od is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Before Y ou Start En 11 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
iPod compatibility This unit can control and listen to songs on an iP od. ! This unit supports only the following iP ods. Supported iP od sof tware versions are shown below . Older versions of iP od soft- ware may not be supported. â iP od third generation (sof tware version 2.3.0) â iP od fourth generation (sof tware version 3.1.1) â iP od photo (software version 1.2.1) â iP od fifth generation (software version 1.3.0) â iP od mini (sof tware version 1.4.1) â iP od nano first generation (software ver- sion 1.3.1) â iP od nano second generation (software version 1.1.3) â iP od nano third generation (software version 1.1.3) â iP od classic (software version 1.1.2) â iP od touch (software version 2.0) ! Music files on iP od touch can be played back. â iPhone (software version 2.0) ! When using an iP od, Inter face Cable for iP od (e.g., CD -IU205V) is required. ! Operations may var y depending on the soft- ware version of iP od. Note This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents and other intellectual prop- erty rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners. Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Corporation , and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation . Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited. About WMA The Wi ndows Media ⢠logo printed on the box indicates that this unit can play back WMA data. ! Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. ! This unit may not operate correctly depend- ing on the application used to encode WMA files. ! This product includes technology owned by Microsoft Corporation and cannot be used or distributed without a license from Microsoft Licensing , Inc. About MP3 Supply of this product only conveys a license for private, non-commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial (i.e. revenue- generating) real time broadcasting (terrestrial, satellite, cable and/or any other media), broad- casting/streaming via internet, intranets and/ or other networks or in other electronic con- tent distribution systems, such as pay-audio or audio- on-demand applications. An indepen- dent license for such use is required. F or de- tails, please visit http://www .mp3licensing.com. About AAC This unit plays back AAC files encoded by iT unes. Before Y ou Start En 12 Section 02
About DivX DivX is a compressed digital video format cre- ated by the DivX î video codec from DivX, Inc. This unit can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the same terminology as DVD video, individual DivX video files are called âÂÂTitles âÂÂ. When naming files/titles on a CD -R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to burning, keep in mind that by default they will be played in alphabeti- cal order . Official DivX î Certified product Plays all versions of DivX î video (including DivX î 6) with standard playback of DivX î media files ! DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under license. About the SA T RADIO READY mark The SA T RADIO READY mark indicates that the Satellite Radio T uner for P ioneer (i.e., XM tuner and Sirius satellite tuner which are sold separately) can be controlled by this unit. Please inquire to your dealer or nearest authorized P ioneer ser vice station regarding the satellite radio tuner that can be connected to this unit. F or satellite radio tuner operation, please refer to the satellite radio tuner owner âÂÂs manual. ! The system will use direct satellite-to -recei- ver broadcasting technology to provide lis- teners in their cars and at home with cr ystal-clear sound seamlessly from coast to coast. Satellite radio will create and package over 100 channels of digital-quality music, news, sports, talk and children âÂÂs programming. ! â SA T Radio âÂÂ, the SA T Radio logo and all re- lated marks are trademarks of Sirius Satel- lite Radio inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc. T o protect the LCD screen ! Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the display when this unit is not being used. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in LCD screen malfunction due to the resulting high temperatures. ! When using a cellular phone, keep the an- tenna of the cellular phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. ! Never touch the screen with anything be- sides your finger when operating the touch panel function. The screen can scratch easily . For viewing the LCD comfortably Due to its construction, the viewing angle of the screen size is limited. Y ou can adjust it by changing either screen size or picture adjust- ment. Changing the wide scr een size By changing the screen size from 4:3 to 16:9, you can adjust the screen so that the screen can fit to the video image you are playing. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the wide screen mode on page 45. Before Y ou Start En 13 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can make the best adjustment to the pic- ture display by the BRIGHTNESS, CONTRAST, COLOR and HUE . Y ou can also dim or bright- en the overall picture the DIMMER. F or details concerning operation, refer to Changing the pictur e adjustment on page 45. What the mark s on DVDs indicate The marks below may be found on DVD disc labels and packages. They indicate the type of images and audio recorded on the disc, and the functions you can use. Mark Meaning 2 Indicates the numbe r of audio sys- tems. 2 Indicates the numbe r of subtitle lan- guages. 3 Indicates the numbe r of viewing an- gles. 16 : 9 LB Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio: screen width-to -height ratio) type. 1 ALL Indicates the numbe r of the region where playback is possible. When an operation is prohibited When you are watching a DVD and attempt to per form an operation, it may not be per formed because of the programming on the disc. When this happens, the icon appears on the screen. ! The icon may not appear with certain discs. Protecting your unit from theft The front panel can be detached to deter theft. ! If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within four seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone will sound. ! Y ou can turn off the warning tone. Refer to Switching the warning tone on page 43. Important ! Handle gently when removing or attaching the front panel. ! Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive shock. ! Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and high temperatures. ! If removed, replace the front panel on the unit before starting up your vehicle. Removing the front panel 1 Press DET ACH to release the front panel. 2 Grab the front panel and remove. T ake care not to grip it too tightly or to drop the front panel and protect it from contact with water or other fluids to prevent perma- nent damage. Attaching the front panel % Replace the front panel by clipping it into place. Before Y ou Start En 14 Section 02
Resetting the microprocessor P ressing RESET lets you reset the micropro - cessor to its initial settings without changing the bookmark information. The microprocessor must be reset under the following conditions: ! P rior to using this unit for the first time after installation ! If the unit fails to operate properly ! When strange or incorrect messages ap- pear on the display 1 T ur n the ignition switch OFF . 2 Press RESET with a pen tip or other pointed instrument. RESET button Note After completing connections or when you want to erase all memorized settings or return the unit to its initial (factor y) settings, switch your engine ON or set the ignition switch to ACC ON before pressing RESET . Feature demo mode The feature demo automatically starts when you select the source OFF. The demo con- tinues while the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON. T o cancel the feature demo, press and hold VOLUME/MUTE. T o restart the feature demo, press and hold VOLUME/MUTE again. Remember that if the feature demo continues operating when the car engine is turned off , it may drain batter y power . Important The red lead (ACC) of this unit should be con- nected to a terminal coupled with ignition switch on/off operations. If this is not done, the vehicle batter y may be drained. Before Y ou Start En 15 Section 02 Before Y ou Start
What â s what Head unit 1 VOLUME/MUTE button Rotate it to increase or decrease the vo - lume. P ress to cut the sound. 2 Disc loading slot Insert a disc to play. 3 EJECT ( h) button P ress to eject a disc from this unit. 4 EQ button P ress to select various equalizer cur ves. 5 OPEN/CLOSE button P ress to open or close the LCD panel. P ress and hold to turn the LCD panel hori- zontal temporarily from upright position. 6 SRC button This unit is turned on by selecting a source. P ress to cycle through all the available sources. 7 c /d (TRACK) buttons P ress to do manual seek tuning, fast for- ward, reverse and track search controls. 8 RESET button P ress to return to the factor y settings (initial settings). 9 DET ACH button P ress to remove the front panel from the head unit. Optional remote control The remote control CD-R55 is sold separately . F or details concerning operations, see the re- mote control manual. Operating this unit En 16 Section 03
Basic Operations Power ON/OFF 1 Source icon T urning the unit on % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. % When using the button, press SRC to turn the unit on. T urning the unit off % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch OFF. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. % When using the button, press SRC and hold until the unit turns off. Selecting a source Y ou can select a source you want to listen to. T o switch to the DVD player , load a disc in the unit. T o switch to the iP od, connect an iP od to this unit. % When using the touch panel keys, touch the source icon and then touch the desired source name. The source names are displayed and select- able ones are highlighted. ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! RADIO â Radio ! iPod â iP od ! USB â USB portable audio player/USB memor y ! TEL â Bluetooth telephone ! BT -Audio â Bluetooth audio player ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! MCD â Multi-CD player ! AUX 1 â AU X 1 ! AUX 2 â AU X 2 ! AV â AV input ! TV â T elevision ! EXT 1 â External unit 1 ! EXT 2 â External unit 2 ! XM â XM tuner ! SIRIUS â SIRIUS tuner ! REARVIEW â Rear view camera ! OFF â T urn the unit off # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. # While operating the menu, you cannot select a source by touching the source icon. # T o close source select menu, touch ESC. # When connecting an iP od, you cannot select a USB source to this unit. % When using the button, press SRC re- peatedly to select a desired source. Notes ! In the following cases, the sound source will not change. â When no unit corresponding to the se- lected source is connected. â When there is no disc or magazine in the player . â When AUX (auxiliar y input) is set to off (refer to page 42). â When the AV (AV input) is not set to VIDEO (refer to page 46). ! AUX1 is set to VIDEO by default. Set the AUX1 to OFF when not in use (refer to Switching the auxiliar y setting on page 42). ! REARVIEW (rear view camera) cannot be se- lected by pressing SRC . Operating this unit En 17 Section 03 Operating this unit
! Image from rear view camera can be dis- played automatically when the appropriate setting is conducted. F or details, refer to Set- ting for rear view camera (back up camera) on page 47. ! External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as ones available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions with this unit. T wo external units can be controlled with this unit. When two external units are connected, the external unit is automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2 by this unit. ! When this unit âÂÂs blue/white lead is connected to the vehicle âÂÂs auto-antenna relay control terminal, the vehicle âÂÂs antenna extends when this unit âÂÂs source is turned on. T o retract the antenna, turn the source off . Adjusting the volume % Use VOLUME/MUTE to adjust the sound level. Rotate VOLUME/MUTE to increa se or de- crease the volume. T ouch panel key basic operat ion Activating the touch panel keys 1 A V MENU key T ouch to display MENU. 2 TIL T ( / ) keys T ouch to adjust the LCD panel angle. 3 T ouch panel keys T ouch to do various operations. 1 T ouch the screen to activate the touch panel keys corresponding to each source. The touch panel keys appear on the display . # T o go to the next group of touch panel keys, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of touch panel keys, touch PREV . 2 T ouch HIDE to hide the touch panel keys. Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when selecting video sources. Operating the menu 1 FUNCTION MENU key T ouch to select functions for each source. 2 AUDIO MENU key T ouch to select various sound quality controls. 3 SYSTEM MENU key T ouch to select various setup functions. 4 ESC key T ouch to cancel the control mode of func- tions. 1 T ouch AV MENU to display MENU. The menu names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # When A V MENU is not displayed, you can dis- play it by touching the screen. Operating this unit En 18 Section 03
2 T ouch the desired key to display the function names you want to operate. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. Opening and closing the LCD panel The LCD panel will be opened or closed auto- matically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off . Y ou can turn off the automatic close/open function. (Refer to page 48.) ! Do not close the LCD panel with hands by force. That cause malfunction. ! The automatic close/open function will op- erate the display as follows. â When the ignition switch is turned OFF while the LCD panel is opened, the LCD panel will close after six seconds. â When the ignition switch is turned ON again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel will be opened automatically . â Removing or attaching the front panel will automatically close or open the LCD panel. (Refer to page 14.) ! When the ignition switch is turned OFF after the LCD panel has been closed, turn- ing the ignition switch ON again (or turning it to ACC) will not open the LCD panel. In this case, press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. ! When closing the LCD panel, check to make sure that it has closed completely . If the LCD panel has stopped halfwa y , leaving it like this could result in damage. CAUTION Keep hands and fingers clear of the unit when opening, closing, or adjusting the LCD panel. Be especially cautious of children âÂÂs hands and fin- gers. % Press OPEN/CLOSE to open the LCD panel. # T o close the LCD panel, press OPEN/CLOSE again. Adjusting the LCD panel angle Important ! If you can hear the LCD panel knocking against your vehicle âÂÂs console or dashboard, touch TIL T ( ) to move the LCD panel a little forward. ! When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be sure to touch TIL T ( / ). F orcibly adjusting the LCD panel by hand may damage it. % T ouch TIL T ( / ) to adjust the LCD panel to an easily viewable angle. The LCD panel angle continues changing as long as you touch TIL T ( / ) and hold. # The adjusted LCD panel angle will be memor- ized and automatically returned to the next time the LCD panel is opened. T urning the LCD panel horizontal When the LCD panel is upright and it hinders the operation of the air conditioner , the panel can be turned horizontal temporarily . Operating this unit En 19 Section 03 Operating this unit
% Press and hold OPEN/CLOSE to tur n the LCD panel horizontal. # T o return to original position, press and hold OPEN/CLOSE again. # The LCD panel returns to the original position automatically with beeping sound 10 seconds after operation. Radio Basic Operations 1 Source icon 2 Band indicator 3 P reset number indicator 4 F requency indicator 5 LOCAL indicator Appears when local seek tuning is on. 6 5 (stereo) indicator Appears when the selected frequency is being broadcast in stereo. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch RADIO to select the radio. 2 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND until the desired band ( FM1, FM2 , FM3 for FM or AM) is displayed. 3 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by press- ing c or d ( TRACK). 4 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the frequencies until a broadcast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip sta- tions. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the key . # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Operating this unit En 20 Section 03
Note Listening AM radio while an iP od is charged from this unit may generate noise. In this case, turn the iP od charge setting off and noise is disap- peared. (Refer to Switching the iP od charge setting on page 48.) Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies Y ou can easily store up to six broadcast fre- quencies for later recall. ! Up to 18 FM stations, six for each of the three FM bands, and six AM stations can be stored in memor y . 1 T ouch LIST to display the preset list. 2 When you find a frequency that you want to store in memory keep touching one of preset tuning keys P1 to P6 until the beep sounds. The selected radio station frequency has been stored in memor y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the radio station frequency is recalled from memor y. 3 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also use a and b to recall radio station frequencies assigned to preset tuning keys P1 to P6 . Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the frequency display . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies BSM (best stations memor y) lets you automa- tically store the six strongest broadcast fre- quencies under preset tuning keys P1 to P6 and once stored there you can tune in to those frequencies with the touch of a key . ! Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM may replace broadcast frequencies you have saved using P1 to P6 . % T ouch BSM on the function menu to turn BSM on. BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing the six strongest broadcast frequencies will be stored under preset tuning keys P1 to P6 in order of their signal strength. When finished, BSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSM again. T uning in strong signals Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for good reception. % T ouch LOCAL on the function menu to set the sensitivity . T ouch LOCAL repeatedly until the desired level of sensitivity appears in the display . There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and two levels for AM: FM: OFF âÂÂLEVEL1 âÂÂLEVEL2 âÂÂLEVEL3 â LEVEL4 AM: OFF â LEVEL1 â LEVEL2 The LEVEL4 setting allows reception of only the strongest stations, while lower settings let you receive progressively weaker stations. Operating this unit En 21 Section 03 Operating this unit
Built-in DVD player Basic Operations 1 Source icon 2 Media indicator Shows the type of disc currently playing. 3 Title/F older number indicator DVD: shows the title currently playing. Compressed audio and DivX: shows the folder currently playing. 4 Chapter/track/file number indicator DVD: shows the chapter currently playing. Video CD and CD: shows the track currently playing. Compressed audio and DivX: shows the file currently playing. 5 Play time indicator 6 V ariable message area DVD video: shows the subtitle language, audio language and viewing angle. CD TEXT , compressed audio and DivX: shows the text information of currently playing disc. 1 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot. Playback will automatically start. # Be sure to turn up the label side of a disc. # After a disc has been inserted, use touch panel keys to select the DVD player . # When the automatic playback function is on, this unit will cancel the DVD menu and automati- cally start playback from the first chapter of the first title. Refer to A utomatic playback of DVDs on page 27. # With some DVD discs, a menu may be dis- played. (Refer to Operating the DVD menu on the next page.) # With a Video CD featuring the PBC (playback control) function, a menu is displayed. (Refer to PBC playback on page 24.) # T o eject a disc, press h (eject). 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 When playing a compressed audio or DivX, touch a or b to select a folder . # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. is displayed only when the list is operated. 4 T o skip back or forward to another chapter/track, briefly touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another chapter/track by pressing c or d ( TRACK). # During PBC playback, a menu may be dis- played if you per form these operations. 5 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. When DVD, DivX disc or Video CD is playing, if you keep touching o or p for five sec- onds, the icon m or n is highlighted. When this happens, fast reverse/fast for ward continues even if you release o or p .T o resume playback at a desired point, touch de . # When playing DVD video or Video CD, fast for- ward/fast reverse may not be possible at certain locations on some discs. If this happens, normal playback automatically resumes. Notes ! If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when displaying video image. ! Read the precautions for the player and discs in the following section. Refer to Handling guideline of discs and player on page 90. ! If an error message such as ERROR-02-XX is displayed, refer to Error messages on page 87. Operating this unit En 22 Section 03
! If bookmark function is on, DVD playback re- sumes from the selected point. F or more de- tails, refer to Resume playback (Bookmark) on page 25. ! If a disc contains a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play . Refer to Switching the media file type on this page. ! There is sometimes a delay between starting up disc playback and the sound being issued. When being read, FORMA T READ is dis- played. ! When playing back files recorded as VBR (variable bit rate) files, the play time will not be correctly displayed if fast forward or reverse operations are used. ! When playing back WMA files, album title list does not appear . ! If the characters recorded on the disc are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Basic playback controls The table below shows the basic controls for playing discs. The following chapters cover other playback features in more details. Key What it does de Starts playback, pauses a disc that â s playing or restarts a paused disc. g Stops playback. o Skips to the start of the current track, chapte r or file, then to previous tracks/chapters/files. ! P er forms fast reverse by touching and holding o . p Skips to the next track, chapter or file. ! P er forms fast forward by touching and holding p . Note Y ou may find with some DVD or Video CD discs that some playback controls do not work in cer- tain parts of the disc. This is not a malfunction. Switching the media file type When playing a disc containing a mixture of various media file types such as DivX and MP3, you can switch between media file types to play. ! This unit allows playback of the following media file type recorded on CD-R/RW/ROM discs. â Audio data (CD -DA) â Compressed audio files (WMA/MP3/ AAC) â DivX video files ! In case of DVD-R/RW/ROM, this unit does not allow playback of audio data (CD-DA). % T ouch MEDIA to switch between media file types. T ouch MEDIA repeatedly to switch between the following media file types: CD (audio data (CD-DA)) âÂÂWMA/MP3/AAC (compressed audio) â DivX (DivX video files) Operating the DVD menu Some DVDs allow you to select from the disc contents using a menu. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! Y ou can display the menu by touching MENU or TOP MENU while a disc is play- ing. T ouching either of these keys again lets you start playback from the location se- lected from the menu. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. Using DVD menu direct touch control This function allows you to operate the DVD menu by touching the menu item directly . % T ouch the desired menu item on the DVD menu directly . # Depending on the contents of DVD discs, this function may not work properly . In this case, using touch panel keys operate the DVD menu. Operating this unit En 23 Section 03 Operating this unit
Using the touch panel keys 1 T ouch to display touch panel keys to operate the DVD menu. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. # T o switch to the DVD menu direct touch con- trol, touch TOUCH . 2 T ouch a , b, c or d to select the desired menu item. 3 T ouch ENTER. Playback starts from the selected menu item. # The way to display the menu differs depending on the disc. PBC playback During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON is displayed. Y ou can operate PBC menu with 10Key. ! This function is available for Video CD. 1 When PBC menu is displayed, touch SEARCH and then touch 10Key. # Depending on the discs, the menu may be two or more pages long. In such case, touch o or p to display the next or previous menu. 2 T ouch 0 to 9 corresponding to a menu number and then touch ENTER to start playback. Playback starts from the selected menu item. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Notes ! Y ou can display the menu by touching RETURN during PBC playback. For details, refer to the instructions provided with the disc. ! PBC playback of Video CD cannot be can- celed. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (Playback Control), PBC ON , search and time search functions cannot be used nor can you select the range for repeat play . Playing DivX î VOD content Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may only be playable a fixed number of times. When you load a disc containing this type of DivX VOD content, the remaining number of plays is shown on-screen and you then have the option of playing the disc (thereby using up one of the remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc that contains expired DivX VOD content (for example, content that has zero remaining plays), Rental Expired. is dis- played. ! If your DivX VOD content allows an unlim- ited number of plays, then you may load the disc into your player and play the con- tent as of ten as you like, and no message will be displayed. Important ! In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . About your regis- tration code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code on page 41. ! DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Di- gital Rights Management) system. This re- stricts playback of content to specific, registered devices. % If the message is displayed after load- ing a disc containing DivX VOD content, touch PLA Y. Playback of the DivX VOD content will start. # T o skip to the next file, touch NEXT PLA Y . # If you do not want to play the DivX VOD con- tent, touch STOP . Skipping back or forwar d to another title ! This function is available for DVD. Operating this unit En 24 Section 03
% T o skip back or forward to another title, touch a or b. T ouching a skips to the start of the next title. T ouching b skips to the start of the previous title. Title numbers are displayed for eight seconds. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . CM skip/CM back This function skips a reproduced image for a specified time. If the currently playing disc contains commercials, it is possible to skip them. ! This function is available for DVD. % T o skip progr essively backward or for - ward, touch or . Each time you touch or it changes steps in the following order: CM back 5 sec. â 15 sec. âÂÂ30 sec. âÂÂ1.0 min. âÂÂ2.0 min. âÂÂ3.0 min. âÂÂ0 sec. CM skip 30 sec. âÂÂ1.0 min. âÂÂ1.5 min. âÂÂ2.0 min. âÂÂ3.0 min. âÂÂ5.0 min. âÂÂ10.0 min. âÂÂ0 sec. Resume playback (Bookmark) The Bookmark function lets you resume play- back from a selected scene the next time the disc is loaded. ! This function is available for DVD video. % During playback, touch BOOKMARK at the point you want to resume playback next time. The selected scene will be bookmarked so that playback resumes from that point next time. Y ou can bookmark up to five discs. After that, the oldest bookmark is replaced by the new one. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # T o clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch- ing BOOKMARK during playback. # Y ou can also bookmark a disc by pressing and holding EJECT at the point you want to bookmark. Next time you load the disc, playback will resume from the bookmarked point. Note that you can only bookmark one disc using this method. T o clear the bookmark on a disc, press EJECT . Searching for the part you want to play Y ou can use the search function to find the part you want to play. ! This function is available for DVD, DivX disc and Video CD. ! Chapter search, track search and time search are not possible when disc playback has been stopped. ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. 1 T ouch SEARCH. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch the desired search option (e.g., CHAP .). # Y ou cannot operate this step during DivX disc playback. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired num- ber . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. # In the time search function, to select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch 7 , 1 , 0 and 0 in that order . 4 T ouch ENTER. This starts playback from the selected part. Note With DVD discs featuring a menu, you can also touch MENU or TOP MENU and then make se- lections from the displayed menu. Operating this unit En 25 Section 03 Operating this unit
Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) DVDs can provide audio playback with differ- ent languages and different systems (Dolby Di- gital, DTS etc.). With DVDs featuring multi- audio recordings, you can switch between lan- guages/audio systems during playback. ! This function is available for DVD and DivX disc. % T ouch AUDIO during playback. Each time you touch AUDIO it switches be- tween audio systems. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between lan- guages/audio systems may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between languages/audio systems using DVD SETUP . For details, refer to Setting the audio language on page 38. ! Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If this unit âÂÂs optical digital outputs are not con- nected, DTS audio will not be output, so select an audio setting other than DTS. ! Display indications such as Dolby D and 5.1ch indicate the audio system recorded on the DVD. Depending on the setting, playback may not be with the same audio system as that indicated. ! T ouching AUDIO during fast for ward/fast re- verse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Changing the subtitle language during playb ack (Multi-subtitle ) With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you can switch between subtitle languages during playback. ! This function is available for DVD and DivX disc. % T ouch SUBTITLE during playback. Each time you touch SUBTITLE it switches be- tween subtitle languages. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Notes ! With some DVDs, switching between subtitle languages may only be possible using a menu display . ! Y ou can also switch between subtitle lan- guages using DVD SETUP . For details, refer to Setting the subtitle language on page 38. ! T ouching SUBTITLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback re- turns you to normal playback. Changing the viewing angle during playback (Multi-angle) With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch among viewing angles during play- back. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! During playback of a scene shot from mul- tiple angles, the angle icon is dis- played. T urn angle icon display on or off using DVD SETUP. F or details, refer to Set- ting the angle icon display on page 39. % T ouch ANGLE during playback of a scene shot from multiple angles. Each time you touch ANGLE it switches be- tween angles. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Note T ouching ANGLE during fast for ward/fast reverse, pause or slow motion playback returns you to normal playback. Operating this unit En 26 Section 03
Frame-by-frame playback This lets you move ahead one frame at a time during playback. ! This function is available for DVD and Video CD. % T ouch r during playback. Each time you touch r , you move ahead one frame. # T o return to normal playback, touch de. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing frame-by-frame playback. Slow motion playback This lets you slow down playback speed. ! This function is available for DVD and Video CD. % Keep touching r until is displayed during playback. The icon is displayed, for ward slow motion playback begins. # T ouching q or r during slow motion play- back, you can change the playback speed in four steps as follows: 1/16 âÂÂ1/8 âÂÂ1/4 âÂÂ1/2 ! During DVD playback, only the remote con- trol can per form this operation. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # T o return to normal playback, touch de. Notes ! There is no sound during slow motion play- back. ! With some discs, images may be unclear dur- ing slow motion playback. ! Reverse slow motion playback is not possible. Return to the specified scene Y ou can return to the specified scene where the DVD you are currently playing has been preprogrammed to return. ! This function is available for DVD video. % T ouch RETURN to return to the speci- fied scene. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # If a specified scene has not been prepro- grammed in DVD disc, this function is not possi- ble. Automatic playback of DVDs When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted, this unit will cancel the DVD menu automati- cally and start playback from the first chapter of the first title. ! This function is available for DVD video. ! Some DVDs may not operate properly . If this function is not fully operated, turn this function off and start playback. % T ouch AUTO PLA Y to tur n automatic playback on. # T o turn automatic playback off , touch AUTO PLA Y again. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . # When the automatic playback is on, you can- not operate repeating play of DVD disc (refer to Repeating play on the next page). T ext information T ext information recorded on a disc can be dis- played. T ext information is displayed on vari- able message area. ! This function is available for CD TEXT , com- pressed audio disc and DivX disc. Operating this unit En 27 Section 03 Operating this unit
Displaying text information % T ouch INFO. T ouch INFO repeatedly to switch between the following settings: For CD TEXT discs : disc title â : disc artist name â : track title â : track artist name For compressed audio discs : folder name â : file name â : album title â : track title â : artist name For DivX discs : folder name â : file name Notes ! Some discs have certain information encoded on the disc during manufacture. These discs may contain such information as the CD title, track title, artist âÂÂs name and playback time and are called CD TEXT discs. ! If specific information has not been recorded on a CD TEXT disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., No name). ! If specific information has not been recorded on a compressed audio disc, No XXXX will be displayed (e.g., NO name). ! When playing back WMA files, album title is not displayed. Selecting tracks from the track list T rack list lets you see the list of tracks on a disc and select one of them to play back. When playing a CD TEXT disc, track titles are displayed. ! This function is available for CD. 1 T ouch LIST. 2 T ouch or to switch between the lists of tracks. 3 T ouch your favorite track. That selection will begin to play . 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Selecting files from the file name list File name list lets you see the list of file names (or folder names) and select one of them to playback. ! This function is available for compressed audio disc and DivX disc. 1 T ouch LIST. 2 T ouch or to switch between the lists of titles. 3 T ouch your favorite file name (or folder name). That selection will begin to play . # When you have selected a folder , a list of the names of the files (or the folders) in it can be viewed. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to select the desired file name. # T o return to the previous list (the folder one level higher), touch . # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Repeating play T racks in a play range are played repeatedly. Play range varies depending on the media. Operating this unit En 28 Section 03
F or DVD, play range can be selected from DISC (disc repeat), TITLE (title repeat) and CHAPTER (chapter repeat). F or Video CD and CD, play range can be se- lected from DISC (disc repeat) and TRACK (track repeat). F or compressed audio and DivX, play range can be selected from DISC (disc repeat), FOLDER (folder repeat) and FILE (file repeat). ! During playback of Video CDs featuring PBC (playback control), this function can- not be operated. % T ouch REPEA T on the function menu to select the repeat range. ! TITLE â Repeat the current title ! CHAPTER â Repeat the current chapter ! TRACK â Repeat the current track ! FILE â Repeat just the current file ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! DISC â Play through the current disc Notes ! If you per form chapter search or fast for ward/ reverse, the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing back compressed audio or DivX, if you per form track search or fast for- ward/reverse during FILE, the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . ! When playing back Video CD or CD, if you per- form track search or fast for ward/reverse dur- ing TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! When playing discs with compressed audio and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play per forms within the currently playing data type even if DISC is selected. Playing tracks in random order T racks in a selected repeat range are played in random order . ! This function is available for CD and com- pressed audio disc. 1 Select the repeat range . Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch RANDOM on the function menu to tur n random play on. T racks will play in a random order within the previously selected repeat range. # T o turn random play off , touch RANDOM again. Scanning tracks or folders Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds of each track on the CD. When playing the compressed audio disc, the first 10 seconds of each track of the current folder (or the first track of each folder) is played. ! This function is available for CD and com- pressed audio disc. 1 Select the repeat range . Refer to Repeating play on the previous page. 2 T ouch SCAN on the function menu to turn scan play on. The first 10 seconds of each track is played. 3 When you find the desired track (or folder) touch SCAN again. Note After track or folder scanning is finished, normal playback of the tracks will begin again. Selecting audio output When playing DVD video discs recorded with LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output. When playing Video CD discs, you can switch between stereo and monaural audio output. Operating this unit En 29 Section 03 Operating this unit
! This function is available for DVD and Video CD. ! This function is not possible when disc playback has been stopped. ! If you selec t Linear PCM , when playing a disc recorded on a dual mono mode, you can operate this function. (Refer to Setting for digital output on page 41.) % T ouch L/R SELECT on the function menu to select the audio output. T ouch L/R SELECT repeatedly until the desired audio output appears in the display . ! L R â left and right ! LEFT â left ! RIGHT â right ! MIX â mixing left and right Note Depending on the disc and the playback location on the disc, the function may not be selectable, indicating that operating this function is not pos- sible. Using compression Using the COMP (compression) function lets you adjust the sound playback quality of this unit. % T ouch COMPRESSION on the function menu to select your favorite setting. OFF âÂÂCOMP1 âÂÂCOMP2 Playing songs on iPod Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control an iP od by using a cable (e.g., CD-IU205V), which is sold separately . 1 Source icon 2 Repeat indicator Shows when repeat range is set to ONE or ALL . 3 Song number indicator 4 Title indicator 5 Shuffle indicator Shows when random play is set to SONGS or ALBUMS . 6 Play time indicator 7 Song information Shows detailed information of currently play- ing song. 8 Battery charging indicator Shows when the batter y charge setting is on. 1 Connect the iPod to this unit. Playback will automatically start. While connected to this unit, PIONEER, Acces- sory Attached or (check mark) is displayed on the iP od. # Before connecting the dock connector of this unit to the iP od, disconnect the headphones from the iP od. # Depending on the model of iP od or the data size in the iP od, there may be a delay to start play- ing after connection. # After the iP od has been connected to this unit, use touch panel keys to select the iP od. Operating this unit En 30 Section 03
# When removing the iP od from this unit, this unit is turned off . 2 T o skip back or forward to another song, touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another song by pressing c or d ( TRACK). 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). 4 When playing a file with chapter , touch o or p to select a chapter . # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Notes ! Read the precautions for iP od in the following section. Refer to page 94. ! If an error message or icon such as ERROR-11 or is displayed, refer to Error messages on page 87. ! Connect directly the dock connector cable to the iP od so that this unit works properly . ! When the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON, the iP od âÂÂs batter y is charged while the iP od is connected to this unit. ! While the iP od is connected to this unit, the iP od cannot be turned on or off . ! The iP od is turned off about two minutes af ter the ignition switch is set to OFF . Playing video This unit can play video if an iPod with video capabilities is connected. ! T o pause video playback, touch MENU. ! This unit can play back âÂÂMovies âÂÂ, âÂÂMusic vi- deos âÂÂ, âÂÂVideo P odcast â and âÂÂTV show â which are downloaded from iT unes store. ! Change the video setting on the iP od so that the iP od can output the video to an ex- ternal device, before you display the video screen. ! F or details, refer to the iP od âÂÂs manuals. 1 T ouch Video. # T o return to the music operation screen, touch Music . 2 Play video on the iPod. Browsing for a song/video Operations to control an iP od with this unit is designed to be as close to the iP od as possible to make operation and song/video search easy . ! If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compa tible with this unit, those charac- ters are not displayed. 1 T ouch MENU to display iPod menus. 2 T ouch one of the categories in which you want to search for a song/video. When browsing for a song ! PLA YLISTS (playlists) ! ARTISTS (artists) ! ALBUMS (albums) ! SONGS (songs) ! PODCASTS (podcasts) ! GENRES (genres) ! COMPOSERS (composers) ! AUDIOBOOKS (audiobooks) When browsing for a video ! V .PLA YLISTS (video playlists) ! Movies ! Music videos ! Video podcasts ! TV shows # T o switch between groups of categories, touch PREV or NEXT . 3 T ouch a list title that you want to play . Repeat this operation until you find the de- sired song/video. # Y ou can start playback throughout the se- lected list by touching and holding desired list title. # Y ou can start a playback of all the songs in the selected list ( GENRES , ARTISTS , COMPOSERS or ALBUMS ). T o do this, touch ALL. Operating this unit En 31 Section 03 Operating this unit
# Y ou can start a playback of all the videos in the selected list (Music videos or TV shows). T o do this, touch ALL . # T o switch between the lists of titles, touch or . # T o return to the previous menu, touch MENU. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Displaying text information on iPod % T ouch INFO to select the desired text in- formation. : song title â : artist name â : album title # If the characters recorded on the iP od are not compatible with this unit, those characters are not displayed. Repeating play F or playback of the songs on the iP od, there are two repeat play ranges: ONE (repeat one song) and ALL (repeat all songs in the list). ! While repeat play range is set to ONE, you cannot select the other songs. However , you can select other songs while browsing. 1 T ouch NEXT. 2 T ouch to select the repeat range. ! ONE â Repeat just the current song ! ALL â Repeat all songs in the selected list # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Playing songs in a random order (shuffle) F or playback of songs on the iP od, there are two random play methods: SONGS (play back songs in a random order) and ALBUMS (play back albums in a random order). % T ouch to select the random play method. ! SONGS â Play back songs in the selected list in random order . ! ALBUMS â Play back songs from a ran- domly selected album in order . # T o cancel the random play , touch repeat- edly until the shuffle icon is turned off . Playing all songs in a random order (shuffle all) This method plays all songs on the iP od ran- domly . % T ouch to tur n shuffle all on. All songs on the iP od play randomly . Operating this unit â s iPod function from your iPod This unit âÂÂs iP od function can be operated from your iPod. Sound can be heard from the car âÂÂs speakers, and operation can be conducted from your iP od. ! While this function is in use, even if the ignition key is turned off , the iP od will not be turned off . T o turn off power , operate the iP od. 1 T ouch to switch the control mode. # T ouching switches the control mode to this unit. # While using this function, play time and titles are not displayed on this unit. # Even if this function is per formed, track up/ down, chapter up/down and fast for ward/reverse can be operated from this unit. # While using this function, browse function cannot be operated from this unit. 2 Operate the connected iPod to select a song/video and play . Operating this unit En 32 Section 03
Pausing a song % T ouch de during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch de again . Selecting songs from album list of currently playing artist Album list of the currently selected artist is displayed. Y ou can select an album or song from the artist name. ! This function is not available for video files. ! Depending on the number of files in the iP od, there may be a delay when displaying a list. 1 T ouch NEXT. 2 T ouch LINK SEARCH to turn link search on. Searches albums of the artist and displays the list. 3 T ouch a list title that you want to play . F or more details about the selecting operation, please see Step 3 of the following section. Refer to Browsing for a song/video on page 31. Note If link search is aborted, NOT FOUND is dis- played. Changing audiobook speed While listening to an audiobook on iPod, play- back speed can be changed. % T ouch A.Book to select your favorite setting. ! FASTER â Playback faster than normal speed ! NORMAL â Playback in normal speed ! SLOWER â Playback slower than normal speed # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . Playing songs on USB portable audio player/USB memory Basic Operations F or details about the supported device, refer to P ortable audio player compatibility on page 11. 1 Source icon 2 Media indicator Shows the type of file currently playing. 3 F older number indicator 4 File number indicator 5 Title indicator 6 Play time indicator 7 Song information Shows detailed information of currently play- ing song. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch USB to select the USB. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch a or b to select a folder . # T o return to folder 01 (ROOT), touch and hold . However , if folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. is displayed only when the list is operated. # Y ou cannot select a folder that does not have a compressed audio file recorded in it. 3 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Operating this unit En 33 Section 03 Operating this unit
4 T o skip back or forward to another compressed audio file, briefly touch o or p . # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another audio file by pressing c or d ( TRACK). Notes ! Optimum performance of this unit may not be obtained depending on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y . ! If folder 01 (ROOT) contains no files, playback commences with folder 02. ! When the USB portable audio player having batter y charging function is connected to this unit and the ignition switch is set to ACC or ON, the batter y is charged. ! Y ou can disconnect the USB portable audio player/USB memory anytime you want to fin- ish listening to it. Pausing compressed audio playback % T ouch de during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch de again . Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM and SCAN operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 28. However , the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player . The repeat play ranges of the USB por- table audio player/USB memor y are: ! FILE â Repeat just the current file ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! ALL â Repeat all files RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 29. SCAN Refer to Scanning tracks or folders on page 29. Notes ! If you select another folder during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to ALL . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during FILE , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . ! When FOLDER is selected, it is not possible to play back a subfolder of that folder . ! After file or folder scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the files begins again. Displaying text information of an audio file The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to T ext information on page 27. ! If the characters recorded on the audio file are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Selecting files from the file name list The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Selecting files fr om the file name list on page 28. Operating this unit En 34 Section 03
Audio Adjustments Introduction of audio adjustments 1 Audio display Shows the audio adjustment status. Important If the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, the audio function will be changed to the multi-channel processor âÂÂs audio menu. F or details, refer to Introduction of DSP ad- justments on page 74. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch AUDIO MENU to display the audio function names. The audio function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When selecting FM and Bluetooth telephone as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . 2 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide the ideal listening environ- ment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER/BALANCE on the audio function menu. # When the rear output setting is S.W , BALANCE will be displayed instead of FADER/BAL ANCE . Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 42. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/r ear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :15 to REAR:15 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR: 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. # When the rear output setting is S.W , you can- not adjust front/rear speaker balance. Refer to Setting the rear output and subwoofer controller on page 42. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT :15 to RIGHT :15 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match the car âÂÂs interior acoustic charac ter- istics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are six stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves. Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL Powerful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal CUSTOM Custom Operating this unit En 35 Section 03 Operating this unit
FLA T Flat SUPER BASS Super bass ! CUSTOM is an adjusted equalizer cur ve that you create. If you make adjustments to an equalizer cur ve, the equalizer cur ve set- ting is memorized in CUSTOM . ! When FLA T is selected, no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ to select the equalizer . P ress EQ repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂCUSTOM â FLA T âÂÂSUPER BASS Adjusting equalizer curves Y ou can adjust the center frequency and the Q factor (cur ve characteristics) of each currently selected cur ve band ( LOW/ MID/ HIGH). ! The actual range of the adjustments are dif- ferent depending on which equalizer cur ve is selected. Level (dB) Center frequency Q=2N Q=2W F requency (Hz) 1 T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c or d next to EQ SELECT to se- lect an equalizer curve. POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂCUSTOM â FLA T âÂÂSUPER BASS 3 T ouch c or d next to BAND to select the equalizer band to adjust. LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) 4 T ouch c or d next to FREQUENCY to se- lect the frequency to adjust. Low : 40Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ160Hz Mid: 200Hz âÂÂ500Hz âÂÂ1kHz âÂÂ2kHz High: 3.15kHz âÂÂ8kHz âÂÂ10kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz 5 T ouch c or d next to Q.FACTOR to se- lect the Q factor . 2W âÂÂ1W âÂÂ1N âÂÂ2N 6 T ouch a or b to adjust the level of the equalizer band. 12dB to -12dB is displayed as the level is in- creased or decreased. # Y ou can then select another band and adjust the level. Adjusting loudness Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the low- and high-sound ranges at low volume. 1 T ouch LOUDNESS on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch d to turn loudness on. # T o turn loudness off , touch c. 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) Using subwoofer output This unit is equipped with a subwoofer output which can be turned on or off . ! When the subwoofer output is on, you can adjust the cut- off frequency and the output level of the subwoofer . 1 T ouch SUB WOOFER on the audio func- tion menu. 2 T ouch d next to SUB WOOFER to tur n subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch c. Operating this unit En 36 Section 03
3 T ouch c or d next to PHASE to select the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display. T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display . 4 T ouch c or d next to LEVEL to adjust the output level of the subwoofer . 6 to âÂÂ24 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. 5 T ouch c or d next to FREQUENCY to se- lect cut-off frequency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies lower than those in the se- lected range are outputted from the subwoo- fer . Boosting the bass Bass boost function boosts the bass level of sound. 1 T ouch BASS BOOSTER on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select a desired level. 0 to 6 is displayed as the level is increased or decreased. Using the high pass filter When you do not want low sounds from the subwoofer output frequency range to play from the front or rear speakers, turn on the HPF (high pass filter). Only frequencies higher than those in the selected range are output from the front or rear speakers. 1 T ouch HPF on the audio function menu. 2 T ouch d next to HPF to turn high pass filter on. # T o turn high pass filter off , touch c. 3 T ouch c or d next to FREQUENCY to se- lect cut-off frequency . Each time you touch c or d selects cut-off fre- quencies in the following order: 50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz Only frequencies higher than those in the se- lected range are output from the front or rear speakers. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 T ouch NEXT on the audio function menu. 3 T ouch SLA. 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 to âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Operating this unit En 37 Section 03 Operating this unit
Setting up the DVD player Introduction of DVD setup adjustments Y ou can use this menu to change audio, subti- tle, parental lock and other DVD settings. 1 DVD setup menu display Shows the DVD setup menu names. 1 T ouch g. SETUP will be displayed instead of MENU . 2 T ouch SETUP. The DVD setup function names are displayed. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Setting the subtitle language Y ou can set a desired subtitle language. If the selected subtitle language is recorded on the DVD, subtitles are displayed in that language. 1 T ouch SUB TITLE LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. A subtitle language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. A subtitle language is set. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on this page. Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is displayed. ! Y ou can also switch the subtitle language by touching SUBTITLE during playback. (Refer to Changing the subtitle language during play- back (Multi-subtitle) on page 26.) ! Even if you use SUBTITLE during playback to switch the subtitle language, this does not af- fect the settings here. When you select OTHERS When you select OTHERS , a language code input display is shown. Please see the follow- ing section to input the four-digit code of the desired language. Refer to Language code chart for DVD on page 97. 1 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the language code. # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 2 T ouch ENTER. Setting the audio language Y ou can set the preferred audio language. 1 T ouch AUDIO LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. An audio language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. The audio language is set. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on this page. Operating this unit En 38 Section 03
Notes ! If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is outputted. ! Y ou can also switch the audio language by touching AUDIO during playback. (Refer to Changing audio language during playback (Multi-audio) on page 26.) ! Even if you use AUDIO during playback to switch the audio language, this does not af- fect the settings here. Setting the menu language Y ou can set the preferred language for dis- plays of menus recorded on a disc. 1 T ouch MENU LANGUAGE on the DVD setup menu. A menu language menu is displayed. 2 T ouch the desired language. The menu language is set. # T o switch to the second language select menu, touch NEXT . # T o return to the first language select menu, touch PREV . # If you have selected OTHERS , refer to When you select OTHERS on the previous page. Note If the selected language is not recorded on the disc, the language specified on the disc is dis- played. Switching the assist subtitle on or off If assist subtitles are recorded on a DVD disc, you can display them by turning the assist subtitle function on. Y ou can turn assist subtitles on or off as de- sired. % T ouch ASSIST SUBTITLE on the DVD setup menu to turn assist subtitles on. # T o turn the assist subtitle off , touch ASSIST SUBTITLE again. Setting the angle icon display Y ou can set it up so that the angle icon ap- pears on scenes where the angle can be switched. ! Initially , this function is set to on. % T ouch MUL TI ANGLE on the DVD setup menu to turn angle icon display on. # T o turn the angle icon display off , touch MUL TI ANGLE again. Setting the aspect ratio There are two kinds of display . A wide screen display has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of 16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of 4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the display connected to REAR MONITOR OUTPUT . ! When using a regular display , select either LETTER BOX or P AN SCAN . Selecting 16 : 9 may result in an unnatural picture. ! If you selec t the TV aspect, the unit âÂÂs dis- play changes to the same setting. % T ouch TV ASPECT on the DVD setup menu to select the TV aspect. T ouch TV ASPECT repeatedly until the desired TV aspect appears in the display. ! 16 : 9 â Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis- played as it is (initial setting) ! LETTER BOX â The picture is the shape of a letterbox with black bands at the top and bottom of the screen ! P AN SCAN â The picture is cut short at the right and left of the screen Operating this unit En 39 Section 03 Operating this unit
Notes ! When playing discs that do not specify P AN SCAN , playback is with LETTER BOX even if you select P AN SCAN setting. Confirm whether the disc package bears the 16 : 9 LB mark. (Refer to page 14.) ! Some discs do not enable changing of the TV aspect. F or details, refer to the disc âÂÂs instruc- tions. Setting the parental lock Some DVD video discs let you use parental lock to restrict children from viewing violent and adult- oriented scenes. Y ou can set the par- ental lock to your desired level. ! When you set a parental lock level and then play a disc featuring parental lock, code number input indications may be dis- played. In this case, playback will begin when the correct code number is input. Setting the code number and level Y ou need to have registered a code number for playing back discs with parental lock. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch P ARENT AL. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input a four digit code number . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 4 T ouch ENTER. The code number is set, and you can now set the level. 5 T ouch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired level. The parental lock level is set. ! LEVEL 8 â Playback of the entire disc is pos- sible (initial setting) ! LEVEL 7 to LEVEL 2 â Playback of discs for children and non-adult-oriented discs is possible ! LEVEL 1 â Playback of discs for children only is possible Notes ! W e recommend to keep a record of your code number in case you forget it. ! The parental lock level is recorded on the disc. Look for the level indication written at the disc package, included literature or on the disc it- self . P arental lock of this unit is not possible if a parental lock level is not recorded in the disc. ! With some discs, the parental lock may be ac- tive only on the scenes with certain levels. The playback of those scenes will be skipped. For details, refer to the instruction manual that came with the discs. Changing the level Y ou can change the set parental lock level. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch P ARENT AL. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the registered code number . 4 T ouch ENTER. This enters the code number , and you can now change the level. # If you input an incorrect code number , the icon is displayed. T ouch C and input the cor - rect code number . # If you forget your code number , refer to If you forget your code number on this page. 5 T ouch any of 1 to 8 to select the desired level. The new parental lock level is set. If you forget your code number Please see the following section, and touch C 10 times. Refer to Changing the level on this page. The registered code number is canceled, letting you register a new one. Operating this unit En 40 Section 03
Setting the DivX subtitle file Y ou can select whether to display DivX exter- nal subtitles or not. ! The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when CUSTOM is selected if no DivX exter- nal subtitle files exist. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch DivX SUB TITLE to select the de- sired subtitle setting. ! ORIGINAL â Display the DivX subtitles ! CUSTOM â Display the DivX external subti- tles Notes ! Up to 42 characters can be displayed on one line. If more than 42 characters are set, the line breaks and the characters are displayed on the next line. ! Up to 126 characters can be displayed on one screen. If more than 126 characters are set, the excess characters will not be displayed. Displaying your DivX î VOD registration code In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) content on this unit, you first need to register the unit with your DivX VOD content provider . Y ou do this by generating a DivX VOD registra- tion code, which you submit to your provider . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch DivX VOD. Y our 8-digit registration code is displayed. ! Make a note of the code as you will need it when you register with a DivX VOD provider . Setting for digital output Audio which is outputted from digital output of this unit can be selected. Normally , set to STREAM . If this unit âÂÂs digital output is not used, there is no need to change settings. ! Selecting Linear PCM enables you to switch the output channel if playing the fol- lowing type of discs. (Refer to Selecting audio output on page 29.) â Dual mono mode DVD video discs 1 T ouch NEXT on the DVD setup menu. 2 T ouch DIGIT AL OUTPUT to select the de- sired digital output setting. ! STREAM â The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is output as it is (initial setting) ! Linear PCM â The Dolby Digital/DTS signal is converted to and output as a linear PCM signal Operating this unit En 41 Section 03 Operating this unit
Initial Settings Adjusting initial settings Using the initial settings, you can customize various system settings to achieve optimal per- formance from this unit. 1 F unction display Shows the function names. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn this unit off. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch AV MENU and then touch INITIAL MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Switching the auxiliary setting Auxiliar y devices connected to this unit can be activated individually . Set each AUX source to ON when using. F or more information about connecting or using auxiliar y devices, refer to Using the AUX source on page 49. Switching the auxiliary 1 setting % T ouch AUX1 on the initial menu to se- lect desired setting. ! VIDEO â an iP od with video capabilities connected with 4-pole mini plug cable (e.g., CD- V150M) ! AUDIO â auxiliar y device connected with a stereo mini plug cable ! OFF â No auxiliar y device is connected Switching the auxiliary 2 setting % T ouch AUX2 on the initial menu to turn auxiliary 2 setting on. # T o turn auxiliar y 2 setting off , touch AUX2 again. Setting the rear output and subwoofer contro ller This unit âÂÂs rear output (rear speaker leads out- put and RCA rear output) can be used for full- range speaker ( FULL) or subwoofer ( S.W) con- nection. If you switch the rear output setting to S.W, you can connect a rear speaker lead directly to a subwoofer without using an auxili- ar y amp. Initially , the unit is set for rear full-range speak- er connection ( FULL). When rear output is connected to full range speakers (when FULL is selected), you can connect other full range speakers ( REAR) or a subwoofer ( S.W) to the RCA rear output. ! When the multi-channel processor (DEQ- P8000) is connected to this unit, you can- not operate this function. 1 T ouch REAR SP on the initial menu. 2 T ouch c or d next to REAR SP to switch the re ar output setting. T ouch c to select full-range speaker and FULL appears in the display . T ouch d to select sub- woofer and S.W appears in the display . # When no subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select FULL (full-range speaker). Operating this unit En 42 Section 03
# When a subwoofer is connected to the rear output, select S.W (subwoofer). # When the rear output setting is S.W , you can- not operate the following procedure. 3 T ouch c or d next to PREOUT to switch the subwoofer output or rear output. T ouching c or d will switch between S.W and REAR and that status will be displayed. Notes ! Even if you change this setting, there is no output unless you turn the subwoofer output on (refer to Using subwoofer output on page 36). ! If you change this setting, subwoofer output in the audio menu will return to the factor y settings. ! Both rear speaker lead outputs and RCA rear output are switched simultaneously in this setting. Changing languages for CAUTION Some operations on this unit are prohibited while driving or needs to be paid a careful at- tention when operating. In such case, a cau- tion appears on the display . Y ou can change the language of the cautions at this setting. % T ouch CAUTION LANGUAGE on the in- itial menu to select your desired language. Each time you touch CAUTION LANGUAGE it selects languages for CAUTION in the follow- ing order : ENGLISH âÂÂESP AÃÂOL âÂÂFRANÃÂAIS Switching the sound muting/ attenuation Sound from this system is muted or attenu- ated autom atically when the signal from the equipment with mute function is received. ! Sound from this system returns to normal when the muting or attenuation is can- celed. % T ouch TEL to select any of the muting, attenuation or off. T ouch TEL until the desired setting appears in the display . ! MUTE â Muting ! A TT -20dB â Attenuation (A TT -20dB has a stronger effect than A TT -10dB ) ! A TT -10dB â Attenuation ! OFF â T urn the sound muting/attenuation off Notes ! The sound is turned off , MUTE is displayed and no audio adjustments are possible. ! The sound is attenuated, AT T is displayed and no audio adjustments, except volume control, are possible. ! Operation returns to normal when the phone connection is ended. Switching the warni ng tone If the front panel is not detached from the head unit within four seconds of turning off the ignition, a warning tone sounds. Y ou can turn off the warning tone. 1 T ouch NEXT on the initial menu. 2 T ouch DT .W ARNING to turn warning tone on. # T o turn warning tone off , touch DT .WARNING again. Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection T o connect your cellular phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology , you need to enter PIN code on your phone to verif y the connection. The default code is 0000 , but you can change this in this function. ! With some Bluetooth audio players, you may be required to enter the Bluetooth audio player PIN code in advance to set this unit for a connection. Operating this unit En 43 Section 03 Operating this unit
! Y ou can only operate this function when Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) is con- nected to this unit. 1 T ouch NEXT on the initial menu. 2 T ouch PINCODE INPUT. PIN code input display appears. 3 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the PIN code of your Bluetooth audio player . # T o cancel the inputted numbers, touch C. 4 After inputting PIN code (up to 16 di- gits), touch ENTER. The PIN code you entered is stored in this sys- tem. Correcting distorted sound Y ou can minimize distortion that may be caused by the equalizer curve settings. Setting an equalizer level high can cause dis- tortion. If high sound is crippled or distorted, tr y switching to LOW . Normally , leave the set- ting at HIGH to ensure quality sound. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch NEXT on the initial menu. 2 T ouch DIGIT AL A TT to switch the digital attenuator setting. T ouch DIGIT AL A TT repeatedly until the de- sired setting appears in the display . ! HIGH â High quality sound ! LOW â Minimize distortion sound Resetting the audio functions Y ou can reset all audio functions except vo- lume. ! Only when the multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000) is connected to this unit, you can operate this function. 1 T ouch NEXT on the initial menu. 2 T ouch AUDIO RESET. 3 T ouch RESET. 4 T ouch RESET again to reset audio func- tions. # T o cancel resetting the audio functions, touch CANCEL . Operating this unit En 44 Section 03
Other Functions Introduction of system adjustments 1 System menu display Shows the system function names. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch SYSTEM MENU to display the system func- tion names. The system function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. # T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . 2 T ouch ESC to return to the display of each source. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Changing the wide screen mode Y ou can select a desired mode for enlarging a 4:3 picture to a 16:9 one. 1 T ouch WIDE MODE on the system menu. 2 T ouch the desired wide mode setting. 3 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. FULL (full) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc- tion only , giving you a 4:3 TV picture (normal pic- ture) without any omissions. JUST (just) The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and the amount of enlargement increases horizontally to the ends, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any disparity even on a wide screen. CINEMA (cinema) The picture is enlarged by the same proportion as FULL or ZOOM in the horizontal direction and by an intermediate proportion between FULL and ZOOM in the vertical direction; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture) where cap- tions lie outside. ZOOM (zoom) A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion both vertically and horizontally ; ideal for a cine- ma-sized picture (wide screen picture). NORMAL (normal) A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no sense of disparity since its proportions are the same as that of the normal picture. Notes ! Different settings can be memorized for each video source. ! When video is viewed in a wide screen mode that does not match its original aspect ratio, it may appear different. ! Remember that using the wide mode feature of this system for commercial or public view- ing purposes may constitute an infringement on the author âÂÂs rights protected by the Copy- right Law . ! The video image will appear coarser when viewed in CINEMA or ZOOM mode. Changing the picture adjustm ent Y ou can adjust the BRIGHTNESS (brightness), CONTRAST (contrast), COLOR (color) and HUE (hue) for each source and rear view cam- era. ! Y ou cannot adjust COLOR or HUE for the audio source. Operating this unit En 45 Section 03 Operating this unit
1 T ouch PICTURE ADJUSTMENT on the system menu. The adjustment function names are displayed. 2 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the function to be adjusted. ! BRIGHTNESS â Adjusts the black intensity ! CONTRAST â Adjusts the contrast ! COLOR â Adjusts the color saturation ! HUE â Adjusts the tone of color (red is em- phasized or green is emphasized) ! DIMMER â Adjust the brightness of display ! REAR VIEW /SOURCE â Switch the picture adjustment modes # Y ou cannot adjust the picture adjustment for rear view camera when CAMERA POLARITY is set to OFF . (Re fer to Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) on the next page.) # With some rear view cameras, picture adjust- ment may not be possible. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the selected item. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the level of selected item. 24 to â 24 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Adjusting the dimmer T o prevent the display from being too bright at night, the display is automatically dimmed when the car âÂÂs headlights are turned on. Y ou can turn the dimmer on or off . 1 T ouch PICTURE ADJUSTMENT on the system menu. The adjustment function names are displayed. 2 T ouch DIMMER. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the brightness. Each time you touch c or d it moves cursor towards the left or the right. The level indicates the brightness of the screen being adjusted. The farther the cursor moves to the right, the brighter the screen be- comes. 4 T ouch ESC to hide the touch panel keys. Selecting the background display Y ou can switch background displays while lis- tening to each source. ! Y ou can enjoy AV (AV input) as the back- ground video image while you are listening to audio source such as radio or CD. % T ouch BACKGROUND on the system menu to select the desired background dis- play . Audio source BGP1 (background picture 1) âÂÂBGP2 (back- ground picture 2) â BGP3 (background picture 3) â AV (A V input) Video source OFF (off) âÂÂBGP1 (background picture 1) â BGP2 (background picture 2) âÂÂBGP3 (back- ground picture 3) â AV (AV input) # When the AV (AV input) is not set to VIDEO , AV cannot be selected. (Refer to this page.) Setting the A V input Y ou can switch the setting according to the connected component. ! Select VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected component as AV source. ! Select S-DVD to watch video of a con- nected DVD player as S-DVD source. ! Select EXT -VIDEO to watch video of a con- nected video unit as EXT source. ! Select TV to watch TV pictures from a con- nected TV tuner as TV source. % T ouch A V INPUT on the system menu to select the A V input setting. ! OFF â No video component connected ! VIDEO â External video component (such as portable video player) ! S-DVD â DVD player connected with RCA cable Operating this unit En 46 Section 03
! EXT -VIDEO â External video unit (such as P ioneer products available in the future) ! TV â TV tuner connected with RCA cable Setting the clock Use these instructions to set the clock. 1 T ouch CLOCK ADJ on the system menu. 2 T ouch ON/OFF to turn the clock display on. # T o turn the clock display off , touch ON/OFF again. 3 T ouch c or d to select the segment of the clock display you wish to set. Each time you touch c or d it will select one segment of the clock display : Hour âÂÂMinute As you select segments of the clock display the segment selected will be highlighted. 4 T ouch a or b to put a clock right. Notes ! Y ou can match the clock to a time signal by touching JUST . â If 00 to 29, the minutes are rounded down. (e.g., 10:18 becomes 10:00.) â If 30 to 59, the minutes are rounded up. (e.g., 10:36 becomes 11:00.) ! Even when the sources are off , the clock dis- play appears on the display . Setting for rear view camera (back up camera) CAUTION Pioneer recommends the use of a camera which outputs mirror reversed images, other- wise screen image may appear reversed. This unit features a function that automatically switches to the rear view camera video ( REAR CAMERA IN jack) when a rear view camera is installed on your vehicle. When the gear shif t is in REVERSE (R) position, the video auto - matically switches to a rear view camera video. (For more details, consult your dealer .) ! After you set up the rear view camera set- ting, move the gear shif t in REVERSE (R) and confirm if a rear view camera video can be shown on the display . ! If the display should be switched to a rear view camera video by error while you are driving forward, change the rear view cam- era setting. ! T o end watching a rear view camera video and return to the source display , press and hold VOLUME/MUTE. ! Even while driving, rear view camera image can be displayed. T o do this, touch REARVIEW source icon. In this case, touch REARVIEW again to turn off the rear view camera. F or details, refer to Selecting a source on page 17. % T ouch CAMERA POLARITY on the sys- tem menu to select an appropriate setting. ! BA TTER Y â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is positive while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! GROUND â When the polarity of the con- nected lead is negative while the gear shift is in REVERSE (R) position ! OFF â When a rear view camera is not con- nected to this unit Adjusting the LCD panel slide position Y ou can adjust the LCD panel slide position so that the panel is set back or for ward. 1 T ouch NEXT on the system menu. 2 T ouch FLAP SET BACK to turn the set back on. The LCD panel slides to the back. # T ouch FLAP SET BACK again to turn the set back off and the LCD panel slides to the front. Operating this unit En 47 Section 03 Operating this unit
Setting the automatic open function T o prevent the display from hitting the shift lever of an automatic vehicle when it is in P (park) position, or when you do not wish the display to open/close automatically , you can set the automatic open function in the manual mode. 1 T ouch NEXT on the system menu. 2 T ouch AUTO FLAP to select the display to open/close automatically or manually . Each time you touch AUTO FLAP it switches between the following settings: ! ON â The LCD panel will be opened or closed automatically with the turning of the ignition switch on or off ! OFF â Y ou have to press OPEN/CLOSE to open/close the LCD panel Switching the iPod charge setting Y ou can turn the iP od charge setting on or off while listening to an iP od. ! Listening AM radio while an iP od is charged from this unit may generate noise. In this case, turn the iP od charge setting off and noise is disappeared. ! Initially , this function is set to on. 1 T ouch NEXT on the system menu. 2 T ouch iPod CHARGE to turn the iPod charge setting on. # T o turn the iPod charge setting off , touch iPod CHARGE again. Note F or maximum per formance, we recommend that you use the latest version of the iP od software. Selecting the OSD color Y ou can change the OSD color . 1 T ouch NEXT on the system menu. 2 T ouch OSD COLOR to select the desired color . BLUE (blue) âÂÂRED (red) âÂÂAMBER (amber) â GREEN (green) â VIOLET (violet) Selecting the illumination color This unit is equipped with multiple-color illu- mination. Y ou can select a desired color from 112 different types of color . Direct selection from preset illumination color Y ou can select an illumination color from the color list. 1 T ouch ILLUMI COLOR to display the set- ting menu. 2 T ouch one of the color list. Y ou can select one from the following list. ! BLUE (blue) ! RED (red) ! AMBER (amber) ! GREEN (green) ! VIOLET (violet) ! SCAN (scanning all colors) Note SCAN setting cycles continuously through all the colors. Customizing the illumination color 1 T ouch ILLUMI COLOR to display the set- ting menu. 2 T ouch to display the customizing menu. 3 Rotate VOLUME/MUTE to customize the color . Operating this unit En 48 Section 03
4 T o store the customized color in mem- ory , touch and hold one of preset keys ( ) 1 to 3 until the beep sounds. The customized color has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset key , the color is recalled from memor y . Adjusting the response positions of the touch panels (T ouch Panel Calibration) If you feel that the touch panel keys on the screen deviate from the actual positions that respond to your touch, adjust the response po- sitions of the touch panel. There are two ad- justment methods: 4-point adjustment, in which you touch four corners of the screen; and 16-point adjustment, in which you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen. ! Make sure to use the supplied pen for ad- justment, and gently touch the screen. If you press the touch panel forcefully , the touch panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp pointed tool such as ballpoint pen or a mechanical pen. Other wise the screen is damaged. ! If touch panel adjustment cannot be per- formed properly , consult your local Pioneer dealer . 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch OFF to turn this unit off. # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 Press and hold EJECT ( h). The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen ap- pears. 3 T ouch each of the arrows on the four corners of the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold VOLUME/MUTE . 4 Press EQ to complete the 4-point ad- justment. The adjusted position data is saved. # Do not turn off the engine while saving the ad- justed position data. 5 Press EQ to proceed to the 16-point ad- justment. The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen appears. # T o cancel the adjustment, press and hold VOLUME/MUTE . 6 Gently touch the center of the mark displayed on the screen with the touch panel adjustment pen. After you touch all the marks, the adjusted po - sition data is saved. # Do not turn off the engine while saving the ad- justed position data. 7 Press and hold VOLUME/MUTE to com- plete the adjustment. Using the AUX source A separately sold auxiliar y device such as VCR or portable device can be connected to this unit. When connected, auxiliar y device is auto- matically recognized as AUX source and as- signed to AUX. About AUX connection method Y ou have two methods to connect auxiliar y de- vice to this unit. Mini pin plug cable ( AUX 1) When connecting auxiliar y device using a mini plug cable iP od and portable audio/video player can be connected to this unit via mini plug cable. ! If an iP od with video capabilities is con- nected to this unit via 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) cable (e.g., CD-V150M), you can enjoy the video contents of the iP od. Operating this unit En 49 Section 03 Operating this unit
! It is possible to connect a portable audio/ video player by using a 3.5 mm plug (4 pole) to RCA cable, which is sold sepa- rately . However , depending on the cable, re- verse connection between red (right side audio) cable and yellow (video) cable is re- quired. Otherwise, audio and video may not be correctly reproduced. % Insert the mini plug into the AUX input jack on this unit. F or more details, refer to What âÂÂs what on page 16. IP-BUS-RCA interconnector ( AUX 2) When connecting auxiliar y device using an IP - BUS-RCA Interc onnector (sold separately) % Use an IP-BUS-RCA Interconnector such as the CD-RB20/CD-RB10 (sold separately) to connect this unit to auxiliary device fea- turing RCA output. F or more details, refer to the IP -BUS-RCA Inter- connector owner âÂÂs manual. # Y ou can only make this type of connection if the auxiliar y device has RCA outputs. Selecting AUX as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch AUX 1/AUX 2 to select AUX as the source. # If the auxiliar y setting is not turned on, AUX cannot be selected. F or more details, refer to Switching the auxiliar y setting on page 42. Setting the AUX title The title displayed for the AUX source can be changed. ! Each title can be up to 10 characters long. 1 After you have selected AUX as the source, touch A V MENU and FUNCTION MENU and then touch NAME EDIT. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. 2 T ouch ABC to select the desired charac- ter type. T ouch ABC repeatedly to switch between the following character types: Alphabet (upper case) âÂÂAlphabet (lower case) â European letters, such as those with ac- cents (e.g., á, à, ä, ç) # Y ou can select to input numbers and symbols by touching 123 . 3 T ouch a or b to select a letter of the al- phabet. 4 T ouch d to move the cursor to the next character position. 5 T ouch OK to store the entered title in memory . 6 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Using the exter nal unit External unit refers to a Pioneer product (such as ones available in the future) that, although incompatible as a source, enables control of basic functions with this unit. T wo external units can be controlled with this unit. When two external units are connected, the external unit is automatically allocated to external unit 1 or external unit 2 by this unit. Basic operations of the external unit are ex- plained below . Allocated functions are differ- ent depending on the connected external unit. F or details concerning functions, refer to exter- nal unit âÂÂs owner âÂÂs manual. Selecting the external unit as the source % T ouch the source icon and then touch EXT 1/EXT 2 to select external unit as the source. Operating this unit En 50 Section 03
Basic operation F unctions allocated to the following opera- tions are different depending on the con- nected external unit. F or details concerning functions, refer to the connected external unit âÂÂs owner âÂÂs manual. % T ouch BAND. % Keep touching BAND. % T ouch c or d. % Keep touching c or d. % T ouch a or b. Using the functions allocated to 1 to 6 keys 1 T ouch NEXT. 2 T ouch any of 1 to 6 to select a function. Advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. ! FUNC1 (function 1) ! FUNC2 (function 2) ! FUNC3 (function 3) ! FUNC4 (function 4) ! AUTO/MANUAL (auto/manual) 2 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Using the PGM button Y ou can operate the preprogrammed functions for each source by using PGM. ! Only the optional remote control (e.g., CD- R55) can operate this function. % Press PGM to turn pause on when se- lecting the following sources: ! DVD â Built-in DVD player ! iPod â iP od ! USB â USB portable audio player/USB memor y ! S-DVD â DVD player/multi-DVD player ! MCD â Multi-CD player ! BT Audio â Bluetooth audio player # T o turn pause off , press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSM on when selecting RADIO as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM and hold to tur n BSSM on when selecting TV as the source. P ress PGM and hold until the BSSM turns on. # T o cancel the storage process, press PGM again. % Press PGM to select the desired channel select setting when selecting XM or SIRIUS as the source. P ress PGM repeatedly to switch between the following channel select settings: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) Operating this unit En 51 Section 03 Operating this unit
XM tuner Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control an XM satellite digital tuner (GEX-P920XM), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the XM tuner âÂÂs operation manuals. This section provides information on XM operations with this unit which differs from that described in the XM tuner âÂÂs operation manual. ! This unit does not have the text scroll function. ! With this unit, you can operate one addi- tional function: XM channel direct selection. 1 Source icon 2 XM band indicator 3 XM channel categor y 4 XM channel select setting indicator Shows what channel select setting has been selected. 5 XM preset number indicator 6 XM channel number indicator 7 Detail information Shows the detail information of the broadcast channel currently being received. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch XM to select the XM. 2 T ouch BAND to select an XM band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired XM band is displayed, XM1 , XM2 or XM3. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired channel. The channels move up or down step by step. Channels that cannot currently be selected are skipped, and the next channel is selected. # If you touch and hold c or d, you can in- crease or decrease the channel number con- tinuously . # Y ou can also select a channel by pressing c or d ( TRACK). # Y ou can also per form tuning from a desired channel category. (Refer to Selecting a channel in the channel categor y on the next page.) Storing and recalling broadcast stations Y ou can easily store up to six broadcast sta- tions for later recall. ! Up to 18 stations, six for each of three XM bands can be stored in memor y . 1 Select the channel that you want to store in memory . 2 T ouch LIST to display the preset list. 3 T ouch and hold a preset tuning key P1 (PRESET1) to P6 (PRESET6) until the beep sounds. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key P1 (PRESET1) to P6 (PRESET6) the sta- tion is recalled from memor y. 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning keys P1 (PRESET1) to P6 (PRESET6) when the CH-NUMBER mode is selected. A vailable accessories En 52 Section 04
Switching the XM channel select mode Y ou have two methods for selecting a channel: by number and by category. When selecting by number , channels in any categor y can be selected. Select by categor y to narrow your search down to only channels in a particular categor y . % T ouch MODE to select the desired chan- nel select mode. T ouch MODE repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) Selecting a channel in the channel category 1 T ouch MODE to select the channel cate- gory select mode. T ouch MODE repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) 2 T ouch a or b to select the desired chan- nel category . 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired chan- nel in the selected channel category . Selecting a channel from the XM channel list display The list content can be switched so you can search for the track you want to listen to not only by the channel name but also by the artist name or song title. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM. ! The channel list shows all the channels during the CH-NUMBER mode, and the channels included in the selected categor y during the CA TEGORY mode. T o switch the channel mode, touch MODE . 1 T ouch . XM channel list appears in the display . Each touch of changes the following set- tings as follows: CHANNEL NAME LIST (channel name) â SONG TITLE LIST (song title) â ARTIST NAME LIST (artist name) 2 T ouch the desired channel that you want to listen to. # T o switch between the lists of names/titles, touch or . # When the CA TEGOR Y mode is selected, touch a or b to switch to another categor y . Selecting an XM channe l directly Y ou can select an XM channel directly by en- tering the desired channel number . 1 T ouch DIRECT. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired chan- nel number . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C. 3 T ouch ENTER. The XM channel of entered number is selected. Using the MyMix function The MyMix function allows you to make the MyMix song playlist. When the song in the MyMix playlist is being broa dcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can tune to the station to listen to that song. ! This function is available for GEX-P920XM. ! A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the song title and the artist name are mem- orized. A vailable accessories En 53 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Making the MyMix playlist Y ou can add a song that is being broadcast to the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song title and its artist name is memorized to this unit. The MyMix function will start on the song that matches the song title and its artist name in the MyMix playlist. 1 When a desired song is broadcast, touch and hold MEMO. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized, and a confir- mation message appears. # The song title and artist name of up to 12 tracks can be memorized. T r ying to save more than 12 tracks will over write old ones. # Y ou cannot memorize the song title or the ar- tist name when â âÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâÂÂâ â is displayed on the title information. # Y ou cannot memorize the song title or the ar- tist name of the channel 000. # It is possible that the memorized title is not displayed correctly . 2 T ouch OK to confirm. ! T o delete the song from the MyMix playlist, refer to Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist on this page. When the song in the MyMix playlist is broadcast As soon as the song in the MyMix playlist starts broadcast on a different station, a mes- sage is displayed. T ouch YES to switch to that station, and you can listen to that song. ! If you would rather not to tune to that sta- tion, touch CANCEL . ! If an alert for the song in the MyMix playlist is set up to off , no alert will be provided even when the song is broadcast. Refer to Setting up a song alert on page 58. ! If there is slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast, no alert will be provided even though they are the same song. Setting up a song alert Y ou can set up an alert on or off by each song in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix playlist and then change each alert setting. Set up an alert to on so you can receive the alert when the song is broadcast, or set it up to off to stop the alert for that song. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The MyMix playlist is displayed. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch the song title that you want to set up the alert to off. The check mark is removed, and the alert for that song is off . Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist Y ou can delete each song in the MyMix playlist. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The MyMix playlist is displayed. 2 T ouch DELETE next to the song title you want to delete. That song will be deleted from the MyMix playlist. # T o delete all the songs in the MyMix playlist, touch DELETE ALL . 3 A message will appear asking you to confirm to delete it. T ouch YES. # T o cancel the deleting, touch NO. Displaying the Radio ID Channel number select setting If you selec t CH000 , the ID code is displayed. % T ouch c or d to select CH000. Channel category select setting RADIO ID is provided as a channel categor y for displaying the ID code. A vailable accessories En 54 Section 04
% T ouch a or b to select RADIO ID from channel category . Display of the ID code repeats displaying RADIO ID and the ID code one af ter the other . # If you select another channel, display of the ID code is canceled. Switching the XM display ! This function is available for GEX-P910XM. % T ouch INFO to switch the XM display . Channel name âÂÂArtist name/feature âÂÂSong/ program title âÂÂChannel categor y SIRIUS Satellite Radio tuner Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a SIRIUS Satel- lite Radio tuner , which is sold separately . When the SIRIUS tuner is used together with this unit, some operations differ slightly from those described in the SIRIUS operation man- ual. This manual provides information on these points. For all other information on using the SIRIUS tuner , please refer to the SIR - IUS operation manual. ! This unit does not have the text scroll function. ! With this unit, you can operate one addi- tional function: SIRIUS channel direct se- lection. Refer to Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly on page 57. 1 Source icon 2 SIRIUS band indicator 3 SIRIUS channel category 4 SIRIUS channel select setting indicator Shows what channel select setting has been selected. 5 SIRIUS preset number indicator 6 SIRIUS channel number indicator 7 Detail information Shows the detail information of the broadcast channel currently being received. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch SIRIUS to select SIRIUS. 2 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired SIR- IUS band is displayed, SR1, SR2 or SR3. A vailable accessories En 55 Section 04 A vailable accessories
# T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 3 T ouch c or d to select a desired channel. The channels move up or down step by step. Channels that cannot currently be selected are skipped, and the next channel is selected. # If you touch and hold c or d, you can in- crease or decrease the channel number con- tinuously . # Y ou can also select a channel by pressing c or d ( TRACK). # Y ou can also per form tuning from a desired channel category. (Refer to Selecting a channel in the channel categor y on this page.) Note It may take a few seconds before you can hear anything while this unit acquires and processes the satellite signal. Storing and recalling broadcast stations Y ou can easily store up to six broadcast sta- tions for later recall. ! Up to 18 stations, six for each of three SIR- IUS bands can be stored in memor y . ! Channels are stored and recalled on a broadcast station basis. This means that if the broadcast station you stored has been assigned to a different channel by SIRIUS, you can still recall the same broadcast sta- tion (though a different channel number may appear in the display). 1 Select the channel that you want to store in memory . 2 T ouch LIST to display the preset list. 3 T ouch and hold a preset tuning key PRESET1 to PRESET6 until the beep sounds. The selected station has been stored in mem- or y . The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key PRESET1 to PRESET6 the station is re- called from memor y . 4 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning keys PRESET1 to PRESET6 when the CH-NUMBER mode is selected. Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode Y ou have two methods for selecting a channel: by number and by category. When selecting by number , channels in any categor y can be selected. Select by categor y to narrow your search down to only channels in a particular categor y . % T ouch MODE to select the desired chan- nel select mode. T ouch MODE repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) Selecting a channel in the channel category Channels are organized into various program categories, e.g. Rock, Classi c, Jazz. Y ou can specify channels by selecting the desired categor y . 1 T ouch MODE to select the channel cate- gory select mode. T ouch MODE repeatedly to switch between the following channel select modes: CH-NUMBER (channel number select setting) â CA TEGOR Y (channel categor y select setting) 2 T ouch a or b to select the desired chan- nel category . 3 T ouch c or d to select the desired chan- nel in the selected channel category . A vailable accessories En 56 Section 04
Selecting a SIRIUS channel directly Y ou can select a SIRIUS channel directly by entering the desired channel number . 1 T ouch DIRECT. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch 0 to 9 to input the desired chan- nel number . # T o cancel the input numbers, touch C. 3 T ouch ENTER. The SIRIUS channel of entered number is selected. Using the MyMix function The MyMix function allows you to make the MyMix song playlist. When the song in the MyMix playlist is being broa dcast on a station other than the one you are listening to, you will be alerted, and you can tune to the station to listen to that song. ! This function is available for CD -SB10/SIR - PNR2/SIR-PNR2C. ! A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the song title and the artist name are mem- orized. Making the MyMix playlist Y ou can add a song that is being broadcast to the MyMix playlist. When it is added, the song title and its artist name is memorized to this unit. The MyMix function will start on the song that matches the song title and its artist name in the MyMix playlist. % When a desired song is broadcast, touch and hold MEMO. The song title and artist name of the song you are listening to are memorized, and a confir- mation message appears. # The song title and artist name of up to 10 tracks can be memorized. When you tr y to save more than 10 tracks, FULL is displayed and that song being broadcast cannot be saved. # Y ou cannot memorize the song title or the ar- tist name of the channel 000. # It is possible that the memorized title is not displayed correctly . When the song in the MyMix playlist is broadcast As soon as the memorized song starts broad- cast on a different station, a song alert is dis- played. T ouch JUMP to switch to that station, and you can listen to that track. ! If you would rather not to tune to that sta- tion, touch ST A Y . ! If an alert for the song in the MyMix playlist is set up to off , no alert will be provided even when the song is broadcast. Refer to Setting up a song alert on the next page. ! If there is slight difference between the memorized title and the title of the song being broadcast, no alert will be provided even though they are the same song. T urning the MyMix function on or off Y ou can turn the MyMix function off and stop this unit to alert you for all the songs in the MyMix playlist. T o restart, turn this function on. ! The MyMix function is on at the default setting. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The display is switched to the memo edit mode. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch ALERT OFF to tur n the MyMix function off. The MyMix function is now off . # T o turn the MyMix function on , touch ALERT ON . A vailable accessories En 57 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Setting up a song alert Y ou can set up an alert on or off by each song in the MyMix playlist. First, display the MyMix playlist and then change each alert setting. Set up an alert to on so you can receive the alert when the song is broadcast, or set it up to off to stop the alert for that song. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The display is switched to the memo edit mode. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to select the song title that you want to turn the alert off. 3 T ouch ON/OFF to turn the alert off. The alert for the song is turned off . Deleting the song from the MyMix playlist Y ou can delete each song in the MyMix playlist. 1 T ouch MEMO EDIT. The song title in the MyMix playlist is dis- played. # T o switch between groups of touch panel keys, touch NEXT or PREV . 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to select the song title that you want to delete. 3 T ouch DELETE. 4 A message will appear asking you to confirm to delete it. T ouch YES. The selected song is deleted. # T o cancel the deleting, touch CANCEL. Using the Game Alert function This system can alert you when games invol- ving your favorite teams are about to start. T o use this function you need in advance to set up a game alert for the teams. ! This function is available for CD -SB10/SIR - PNR2/SIR-PNR2C. Selecting teams for Game Alert 1 T ouch TEAM SET. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT next to LEAGUE to select a desired league. League names are switched in the display . 3 T ouch PREV or NEXT next to TEAM to select a desired team. T eams in the selected categor y are switched in the display . 4 T ouch ON/OFF to store the selected team in memory . ON is displayed with the selected team, and the Game Alert function will start on that team. # T o turn the Game Alert off of the selected team, touch ON/OFF again. # When you have already made 12 team selec- tions, FULL is displayed and additional team se- lection is not possible. In this case, first delete the team selection and then tr y again. 5 Repeat these steps for selecting other teams. Up to 12 teams can be selected. Switching the Game Alert on or off Once you made team selections, you need to turn the Game Alert function on. ! The Game Alert function is on at the default setting. 1 T ouch TEAM SET. 2 T ouch ALERT ON to tur n the Game Alert on. The Game Alert function is now on. # T o turn the Game Alert function off , touch ALERT OFF . A vailable accessories En 58 Section 04
When the game of the selected team starts When a game of the selected team is about to start (or is currently playing) on a different sta- tion, a game alert is displayed. T ouch JUMP to switch to that station, and you can listen to that game. ! If you would rather not to tune to that sta- tion, touch ST A Y . Displaying game information If games of your selected teams are currently playing, you can display information of the games and tune to the broadcast channel. 1 T ouch GAME INFO. The game information of your selected team is displayed. 2 T ouch PREV or NEXT to select a game. The game is displayed, followed by more de- tailed game information. ! Game score will be updated automatically . 3 T ouch T une TO to switch to that station to listen to the game. Notes ! If you have not made any team selections, NOT SET is displayed. ! When games involving your favorite teams are not currently playing, NO GAME is displayed. Displaying the Radio ID If you selec t CH000 , the ID code is displayed. % T ouch c or d to select CH000. # T o select CH000 , set the channel select setting to CH-NUMBER . About the channel select set- ting, refer to Selecting the SIRIUS channel select mode on page 56. Switching the SIRIUS display ! This function is available for SIR-PNR1. % T ouch INFO to switch the SIRIUS display . Channel name âÂÂArtist name/feature âÂÂSong/ program title âÂÂChannel categor y Using Instant Replay function F ollowing functions can be operated during the Instant Replay mode. ! T o use this function, Pioneer SIRIUS bus in- ter face (e.g. CD-SB10) is required. ! T o use this function, SIRIUS plug-and-play unit with Instant Replay F unction is re- quired. ! F or details, refer to SIRIUS plug-and-play unit âÂÂs manuals. % T ouch NEXT. % T ouch INST ANT REPLA Y. Instant Replay mode is displayed. Now , Instant Replay mode can be per formed. # In the following conditions, tuner exits from the Instant Replay mode. â When LIVE is touched â When another source is selected % Select a track T ouch c or d. % Pause and play T ouch de. % Fast forward or reverse T ouch and hold c or d for about one second and release. A vailable accessories En 59 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Bluetooth Audio Basic Operations If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD- BTB200) to this unit, you can control Bluetooth audio players via Bluetooth wireless technology . ! In some countries, CD-BTB200 is not sold on the mark et. Important ! Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con- nected to this unit, the operations available with this unit are limited to the following two levels: â A2DP profile (Advanced Audio Distribution P rofile): Only playing back songs on your audio player is possible. â A VRCP profile (Audio/Video Remote Con- trol P rofile): Playing back, pausing, select- ing songs, etc., are possible. ! Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio players available on the market, operations with your Bluetooth audio player using this unit var y extensively . Refer to the instruction manual that came with your Bluetooth audio player as well as this manual while operating your player on this unit. ! Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can- not be displayed on this unit. ! While you are listening to songs on your Blue- tooth audio player , refrain from using on your cellular phone as much as possible. If you use your cellular phone, the signal from your cel- lular phone may cause noise on the song play- back. ! When you are talking on a cellular phone con- nected to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology , song playback from your Bluetooth audio player connected to this unit is muted. ! Even if you are listening to a song on your Bluetooth audio player and you switch to an- other source, song playback continues. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief information on Blue- tooth audio player operations with this unit, which slightly differs or is abbreviated from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs op- eration manual. ! Even though your audio player does not contain a Bluetooth module, you can still control it from this unit via Bluetooth wire- less technology. T o control your audio player using this unit, connect a product featuring Bluetooth wireless technology (available on the market) to your audio player and connect the Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD -BTB200) to this unit. 1 Source icon 2 Device name Shows the device name of the connected Bluetooth audio player (or Bluetooth adapter). 3 Connection indicator Shows the Bluetooth wireless connection sta- tus. 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch BT Audio to select the Bluetooth audio source. # F or this unit to control your Bluetooth audio player it needs to establish a Bluetooth wireless connection. (Refer to Connecting a Bluetooth audio player on the next page.) 2 T ouch d . Playback starts. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, briefly touch o or p. 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. A vailable accessories En 60 Section 04
5 T o stop playback, touch g. Pausing playback % T ouch e during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch d. Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Connecting a Bluetooth audio player % T ouch CONNECTION OPEN on the func- tion menu to turn the connection open on. CONNECTION W AITING is displayed. This unit is now on standby for connection from Bluetooth audio player . If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, connection to this unit is automatically established. Note Before you can use audio players you may need to enter the PIN code into this unit. If your player requires a PIN code to establish a connection, look for the code on the player or in its accompa- nying documentation . Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless connection on page 43. Disconnecting a Bluetooth audio player % T ouch DISCONNECT on the function menu. After the discon nection is completed, NO CONNECTION is displayed. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address % T ouch DEVICE INFO on the function menu to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the Bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! DEVICE NAME (device name of this sys- tem) ! BD ADDRESS (address of Bluetooth device) ! SYSTEM VERSION (system version) ! BT MODULE VERSION (version of Blue- tooth module) A vailable accessories En 61 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Bluetooth T elephone Basic Operations If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD- BTB200), you can connect a cellular phone fea- turing Bluetooth wir eless technology to this unit for hands-free, wir eless calls, even while driving. ! In some countries, CD-BTB200 is not sold on the mark et. Important ! Since this unit is on standby to connect with your cellular phone via Bluetooth wireless technology , using this unit without running the engine can result in batter y drainage. ! Advanced operations that require your atten- tion such as dialing numbers on the monitor , using phone book, etc., are prohibited while you are driving. When you need to use these advanced operations, stop your vehicle in a safe place. F or details concerning operation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides brief information on the hands-free phoning operations with this unit which slightly differs or is cut short from that described in the Bluetooth adapter âÂÂs operation manual. ! This unit is not compa tible with registration for guest phone. ! This unit does not have the name edit func- tion of a Phone Book entr y . 1 Source icon 2 User number indicator Shows the registration number of the cellular phone. 3 Device name Shows the device name of the cellular phone. 4 Phone number Shows the phone number you selected. 5 V oice recognition indicator Shows when the voice recognition function is on (for more details, refer to V oice recognition on the next page). 6 Incoming call notice indication Shows when an incoming call has been re- ceived and not checked yet. ! Incoming call notice is not displayed for calls made when your cellular phone is disconnected from this unit. 7 Automatic answering/Automatic rejecting in- dicator Shows when the automatic answering func- tion is on (for more details, refer to Setting automatic answering on page 68). Shows when the automatic rejecting function is on (for more details, refer to Setting auto- matic rejecting on page 68). 8 Battery strength indicator Shows the batter y strength of cellular phone. ! The level shown on the indicator may differ from the actual batter y strength. ! If the batter y strength is not available, nothing is displayed in the batter y strength indicator area. 9 Signal level indicator Shows the signal strength of cellular phone. ! The level shown on the indicator may differ form the actual signal level. ! Depending on the cellular phones fea- turing Bluetooth wireless technology , radio field intensity is not available. In this case, the signal level indicator does not appear . ! If your cellular phone is out of ser vice, is displayed. a T elephone indicator A vailable accessories En 62 Section 04
Shows when a phone connection using Blue- tooth wireless technology is established (for more details, refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page). ! While connecting automatically, tele- phone indicator is flashing. % T ouch the source icon and then touch TEL to select the telephone. Note Equalizer cur ve for the phone source is fixed. When selecting the phone source, you cannot op- erate the equalizer function. Refer to Recalling equalizer cur ves on page 35. When the multi-channel processor is connected to this unit, you can operate the equalizer func- tion even when selecting the phone source. Refer to Recalling equalizer cur ves on page 81. Setting up for hands-fr ee phoning Before you can use the hands-free phoning function you must set up the unit for use with your cellular phone. This entails establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection between this unit and your phone, registering your phone with this unit, and adjusting the volume level. 1 Connection F or detailed instructions on connecting your phone to this unit via Bluetooth wireless tech- nology , refer to Connecting a cellular phone on the next page. # Y our phone should now be temporarily con- nected. However , to make best use of the technol- ogy , we recommend you register the phone to this unit. 2 Registration T o register your temporarily connected phone, refer to Registering a connected cellular phone on page 65. 3 V olume adjustment Adjust the earpiece volume on your cellular phone for comfort. When adjusted, the volume level is recorded in this unit as the default set- ting. # Caller âÂÂs voice volume and ring volume may var y depending on the type of cellular phone. # If the difference between the ring volume and caller âÂÂs voice volume is big, overall volume level may become unstable. # Before disconnecting the cellular phone from this unit, make sure to adjust the volume to a proper level. If the volume is muted (zero level) on your cellular phone, the volume level of your cel- lular phone remains muted even after the cellular phone is disconnected. Making a phone call V oice recognition 1 T ouch VOICE to turn the voice recogni- tion function on. V oice dial icon appears on the information bar . V oice recognition function is now ready. # T o cancel the voice recognition function, touch VOICE again. 2 Pronounce the name of your contact. T aking a phone call Answering an incoming call 1 When a call comes in, touch . # Y ou can also per form this operation by press- ing c ( TRACK). # If private mode is selected on the cellular phone, hands-free phoning may not be per- formed. 2 T o end the call, touch . # Y ou can also per form this operation by press- ing d ( TRACK). Rejecting an incoming call % When a call comes in, touch . The call is rejected. A vailable accessories En 63 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Answering a call waiting 1 T ouch to answer a call waiting. 2 T ouch to end all calls. # The caller you have been talking to is now on hold. T o end the call, both you and your caller need to hang up the phone. # While your callers hold the line, touching switches between callers. Rejecting call waiting % T ouch to reject a call waiting. Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the telephone standby display . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Connecting a cellular phone Searching for available cellular phones 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch SEARCH to search for available cellular phones. While searching, SEARCHING flashes. When available cellular phones featuring Bluetooth wireless technology are found, device name or Name Not Found (if names cannot be ob- tained) is displayed. # If this unit fails to find any available cellular phones, NOT FOUND is displayed. # Y ou can display the BD address by touching BD ADDR . T o return to the device name, touch PHONE NAME . 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, CONNECTING flashes. T o complete the connection, check the device name ( Pioneer BT unit2) and enter the link code on your cellular phone. If the connection is established, CONNECTED is displayed. # PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 43. Using a cellular phone to initiate a connection 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch CONNECTION OPEN. CONNECTION W AITING flashes and the unit is now on standby for connection from a cellu- lar phone. 3 Use cellular phone to connect to this unit. # T o cancel this function, touch CONNECTION OPEN again. # PIN code is set to 0000 as the default. Y ou can change this code in the initial setting. Refer to Entering PIN code for Bluetooth wireless con- nection on page 43. Disconnecting a cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DISCONNECT to disconnect the currently connected cellular phone from this unit. After disconnection is completed, NO CONNECTION is displayed. A vailable accessories En 64 Section 04
Registering a connected cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. Registration assignments for user phone 1, 2 and 3 appear on the display . 2 T ouch and hold one of the registration assignments to register the currently con- nected phone. If the registration is succeeded, the device name of the connected phone is displayed in the selected assignment. # If the assignment is empty , the device name is not displayed. If the assignment is already taken, the device name appears. T o replace an assign- ment with a new phone, first delete the current assignment. For more detailed instructions, see Deleting a registered phone on this page. # If the registration failed, device name of the connected phone is not displayed in the selected assignment. In this case, return to step 1 and tr y again. Deleting a registered phone 1 T ouch PHONE REGISTER on the function menu. 2 T ouch DELETE next to the device name you want to delete. A confirmation display appears. T ouch OK to delete the phone. # T o cancel deleting a registered phone, touch CANCEL . Connecting to a register ed cellular phone Connecting to a registered phone manually 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DIRECT CONNECT. 3 T ouch the device name you want to connect. While connecting, CONNECTING is flashing. If the connection is established, CONNECTED is displayed. Connecting to a registered phone automatically 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch AUTO CONNECT to tur n the Automatic Connection function on. If your cellular phone is ready for Bluetooth wireless connection, connection to this unit is automatically established. # T o turn automatic connection off , touch AUTO CONNECT again. Using the phone book T ransferring entries to the phone book The Phone Book can hold a total of 500 en- tries. 300 from User 1, 150 from User 2, and 50 from User 3. 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK TRANSFER on the function menu. 2 T ouch ST ART to turn the Phone Book T ransfer function on. The Phone Book T ransfer is now on standby . 3 Use the cellular phone to perform phone book transfer . P er form phone book transfer using the cellu- lar phone. For detailed instructions, refer to the instruction manual that came with your cellular phone. # The display indicates how many entries have been transferred and the total number to be transferred. # T o cancel the transferring process, touch STOP . 4 When you are done transferring Phone Book entries, touch ESC. A vailable accessories En 65 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Note When the phone book transfer is complete, the connection to your cellular phone is off . T o use the Phone Book, connect to your cellular phone once again, referring to Connecting to a registered cellular phone on the previous page. Changing the phone book display order % T ouch PHONE BOOK NAME VIEW on the function menu to change the name view order . INVERTED is displayed and the name view order is changed. # T o change to the original order ( ORIGINAL), touch PHONE BOOK NAME VIEW again. Calling a number in the phone book Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 T ouch a or b to select the first letter of the name you are looking for . T ouching a or b changes alphabetical letters. 3 T ouch ENTER to show entries starting with the letter you chose. The display shows the first six Phone Book en- tries starting with that letter (e.g. âÂÂBen âÂÂ, â Brianâ and â Burtâ when â Bâ is selected). # T ouch or to display other phone book en- tries. # T o refine the search with a different letter , touch CLEAR . 4 T ouch a Phone Book entry you want to call. The display is switched to the Phone Book de- tail display. 5 T ouch phone number of the Phone Book entry you want to call. If several phone numbers are entered to an entr y , touch one you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the Phone Book entr y you selected is dis- played on the information bar . 6 T ouch to make a call. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 7 T o end the call, touch . Editing phone numbers Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . Y ou can edit the numbers of Phone Book en- tries. Each phone number can be up to 24 di- gits long. 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to edit. Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section for how to do this. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on this page. 3 T ouch EDIT next to the phone number you want to edit. The display is changed to the Phone Book dial edit display. 4 T ouch 0 to 9 to input numbers. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. 5 T ouch OK to store the new number . A vailable accessories En 66 Section 04
Clearing a phone book entry Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . 1 T ouch PHONE BOOK to display the Phone Book. 2 Select a Phone Book entry you want to delete. Please see Steps 2 to 4 of the following section for how to do this. Refer to Calling a number in the phone book on the previous page. 3 T ouch DELETE to delete the Phone Book entry . A confirmation display appears. T ouch YES to delete the entr y . # If you do not want to clear a Phone Book entr y that you have selected, touch NO . Using the call history Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . The 6 most recent calls made (dialed), re- ceived and missed, are stored in the Call His- tor y . Y ou can browse the Call Histor y and call numbers from it. 1 T ouch LOG to display the Call History . 2 T ouch LOG repeatedly to switch the call histories. MISSED CALL LIST (missed call) â DIALED CALL LIST (dialed call) â RECEIVED CALL LIST (received call) # Y ou can switch between phone number and name (if entered) by touching ABC/123 . # If no phone numbers have been stored in the selected list, nothing is displayed. 3 T ouch a phone number or name (if en- tered) you want to call. The display returns to the normal display and the phone number you selected is displayed on the information bar . 4 T ouch to make a call. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . 5 T o end the call, touch . Using preset numbers Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . Assigning preset numbers Numbers that you dial frequently can be as- signed to presets for quick recall. Y ou can assign up to 6 frequently called phone numbers to number presets. 1 Select a desired phone number from the phone book or the call history . Or di- rectly enter a desired phone number . T o select a desired phone number from the Phone Book or the Call Histor y , see the in- structions explained in previous pages. T o di- rectly enter a desired phone number , please see the following section. Refer to Making a call by entering phone number on the next page. The display should now be the normal display and the selected phone number is displayed on the information bar . 2 T ouch LIST to display preset assign- ments. P reset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 3 Keep touching one of preset assign- ments to store the phone number . The phone number you selected is stored in presets. A vailable accessories En 67 Section 04 A vailable accessories
# No Data is displayed for empty assignment. Even if the assignment is taken, you can replace it to the new one by keeping touching the assign- ment. Recalling preset numbers 1 T ouch LIST to display preset assign- ments. P reset assignments appear in the display (if not displayed yet). 2 T ouch one of preset assignments. The selected phone number should now be displayed on the information bar . 3 T ouch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . Making a call by entering phone number Important Be sure to park your vehicle and apply the park- ing brake when per forming this operation . 1 T ouch DIRECT to display the direct dial display . 2 T ouch 0 to 9 to input numbers. # F or an international call, touch add â â to add to the phone number . # T ouch CLEAR to delete the number . T ouch and hold CLEAR to delete all the input numbers. # Up to 24 digits can be entered. # If you want to store the entered phone number to preset assignment, touch SET here. The display returns to the normal display and the phone num- ber you entered is selected. 3 When you completed entering the number , touch to make a call. 4 T o end the call, touch . Clearing memory 1 T ouch CLEAR MEMORY on the function menu. 2 T ouch CLEAR next to the item you want to delete from the memory . Select from the following: ! PHONE BOOK (phone book) ! DIALED CALLS (dialed call history) ! RECEIVED CALLS (received call histor y) ! MISSED CALLS (missed call history) ! DIAL PRESET (preset phone numbers) After selecting a desired item, a confirmation display appears. T ouch OK to delete the mem- or y . # If you do not want to clear memory that you have selected, touch CANCEL . # If you want to clear all the Phone Book, dia- led/received/missed call histor y list and preset phone number , touch CLEAR ALL. Setting automatic answering % T ouch AUTO ANSWER on the function menu to turn the automatic answer on. # T o turn the automatic answer off , touch AUTO ANSWER again. Setting automatic rejecting 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch REFUSE ALL CALLS to turn the automatic call rejection on. # T o turn the automatic call rejection off , touch REFUSE ALL CALLS again. Switching the ring tone 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch RING TONE to tur n the ring tone on. # T o turn the ring tone off , touch RING TONE again. A vailable accessories En 68 Section 04
Echo canceling and noise reduction 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch ECHO CANCEL to tur n Echo Can- cel function on. # T o turn echo canceling off , touch ECHO CANCEL again. Displaying BD (Bluetooth Device) address Displaying BD address of this system 1 T ouch NEXT on the function menu. 2 T ouch DEVICE INFO to display the BD address. V arious information regarding the Bluetooth wireless technology are displayed. ! DEVICE NAME (device name of this sys- tem) ! BD ADDRESS (address of Bluetooth device) ! SYSTEM VERSION (version of this unit âÂÂs microprocessor) ! BT MODULE VERSION (version of Blue- tooth module) Displaying BD address of your cellular phone 1 T ouch PHONE CONNECT on the function menu. 2 T ouch BD ADDRESS to display the BD address. 12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed. # T o return to the device name, touch PHONE NAME . Multi-CD Player Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a multi-CD player , which is sold separately . ! This unit does not have ITS playlist, disc title and track title list functions. ! Only functions described in this manual are supported by 50-disc multi- CD players. ! This unit is not designed to operate disc title list functions with a 50-disc multi- CD player . 1 Source icon 2 Disc number indicator 3 Disc title indicator Shows the title of the currently playing disc only when playing CD TEXT discs. 4 T rack number indicator 5 Play time indicator 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch MCD to select the multi-CD player . 2 T ouch a or b to select a disc. 3 T o skip back or forward to another track, briefly touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another track by pressing c or d ( TRACK). 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Notes ! When multi-CD player completes preparator y operations, READY is displayed. A vailable accessories En 69 Section 04 A vailable accessories
! If an error message such as ERROR-02-XX is displayed, refer to the multi-CD player owner âÂÂs manual. ! If there are no discs in the multi-CD player ma- gazine, NO DISC is displayed. Selecting a disc 1 T ouch LIST. 2 T ouch your favorite disc. Selectable discs are highlighted. 3 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Pausing CD playback % T ouch de during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch de again . Introduction to advanced operations Y ou can only use these functions with a multi- CD player that supports them. 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM, SCAN and COMPRESSION operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 28. However , the repeat play ranges you can select are different from that of the built-in DVD player . The repeat play ranges of the multi- CD player are: ! MUL TI-CD â Repeat all discs in the multi-CD player ! TRACK â Repeat jus t the cur- rent track ! DISC â Repeat the current disc RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 29. SCAN Refer to Scanning tracks or folders on page 29. COMPRESSION Refer to Using compr ession on page 30. Multi-CD player has COMP (com- pression) and DBE (dynamic bass emphasis) functions. The settings can be switched as below : OFF âÂÂCOMP1 âÂÂCOMP2 âÂÂOFF â DBE 1 âÂÂDBE 2 Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to MUL TI-CD . ! If you per form track search or fast for ward/re- verse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! After track or disc scanning is finished, nor- mal playback of the tracks begins again. ! If the multi-CD player does not support COMP/DBE, you cannot operate this function. Using CD TEXT functions Y ou can use these functions only with a CD TEXT compatible multi-CD player . The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to T ext information on page 27. A vailable accessories En 70 Section 04
DVD Player Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a DVD player or multi-DVD player , which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the DVD player âÂÂs or multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. This section provides information on DVD operations with this unit which differs from that described in the DVD player â so r multi-DVD player âÂÂs operation manual. ! This unit does not have ITS playlist and disc title functions. 1 Source icon 2 Media indicator 3 Disc number indicator Shows the number of the disc currently play- ing when using a multi-DVD player . 4 Title/F older number indicator 5 Chapter/track number indicator 6 Play time indicator 7 V ariable message area Shows the text information of disc currently playing when playing a compressed audio disc. ! This unit cannot display the text infor- mation recorded on a CD TEXT disc playing on the optional DVD player . 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch S-DVD to select the DVD player . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T o skip back or forward to another chapter/track, briefly touch o or p. # Y ou can also skip back or for ward to another chapter/track by pressing c or d ( TRACK). 4 T o perform fast forward or reverse, keep touching o or p. # Y ou can also per form fast reverse/fast for ward by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically when playing DVD video or Video CD. Selecting a disc ! Y ou can operate this function only when a multi-DVD player is connected to this unit. 1 T ouch LIST. 2 T ouch your favorite disc. Selectable discs are highlighted. 3 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also select a disc by keeping touching a or b. Selecting a folder ! Y ou can operate this function only when a DVD player compatible with compressed audio playback is connected to this unit. % T ouch a or b to select a folder . Pausing disc playback % T ouch de during playback. # T o resume playback at the same point that you turned pause on, touch de again . A vailable accessories En 71 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Introduction to advanced operations 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. The function names are displayed and oper- able ones are highlighted. 2 T ouch ESC to return to the playback dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Function and operation REPEA T , RANDOM and SCAN operations are basically the same as that of the built-in DVD player . Function name Operation REPEA T Refer to Repeating play on page 28. But the repeat play range that you can select is var y depe nding on the type of disc or system. The re- peat play ranges of the DVD player/multi-DVD player are as below : During PBC playback of Video CDs, this function cannot be oper- ated. ! DISC â Repeat the current disc ! FOLDER â Repeat the current folder ! TITLE â Repeat just the current title ! CHAPTER â Repeat just the current chapter ! TRACK â Repeat the current track RANDOM Refer to Playing tracks in random order on page 29. SCAN Refer to Scanning tracks or folders on page 29. Notes ! If you select other discs during repeat play , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing back Video CD or CD, if you per- form track search or fast for ward/reverse dur- ing TRACK , the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing back compressed audio, if you select another folder during repeat play, the repeat play range changes to DISC . ! When playing back compressed audio, if you per form track search or fast forward/reverse during TRACK , the repeat play range changes to FOLDER . Displaying text information of an audio file The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to T ext information on page 27. ! If the characters recorded on the audio file are not compatible with this unit, those characters will not be displayed. Selecting files from the file name list ! Y ou can operate this function only when a DVD player compatible with compressed audio playback is connected to this unit. 1 T ouch LIST to display the disc list. 2 T ouch LIST repeatedly to switch the lists. DISC LIST (disc list) âÂÂFOLDER&FILE LIST (folder and file list) 3 Select the desired file name (or folder name). The operation is the same as that of the built- in DVD player . Refer to Selecting files fr om the file name list on page 28. A vailable accessories En 72 Section 04
TV tuner Important This manual describes analog TV tuner operation. If you are already using a Pioneer analog TV tuner , such as the GEX-P5700TV , read this section. However , please read the important information below . ! P ioneer stopped selling analog TV tuners in the U.S. in 2006, and analog TV tuners are also no longer available in Canadian markets. P ioneer does not sell a digital TV tuner in the U.S. or in Canada. ! In the U.S., the switch from analog TV to digi- tal TV broadcasting is planned for F ebruar y 17, 2009. ! In Canada, the switch from analog TV to digi- tal TV broadcasting is planned for August 31, 2011. ! THIS MEANS THA T AF TER THE DA TES SPECI- FIED ABOVE (SUBJECT TO CHANGE), YOU CAN NO L ONGER USE THIS UNIT WITH AN ANAL OG TV TUNER TO WA TCH ALMOST ALL TV PROGRAMMING BROADCAST OVER- THE- AIR . Basic Operations Y ou can use this unit to control a TV tuner (e.g. GEX-P5700TV), which is sold separately . F or details concerning operation, refer to the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. This section pro- vides information on TV operations with this unit, which differs from that described in the TV tuner âÂÂs operation manual. 1 Source icon 2 Band indicator 3 P reset number indicator 4 Channel indicator 1 T ouch the source icon and then touch TV to select the TV . # When the source icon is not displayed, you can display it by touching the screen. 2 T ouch the screen to display the touch panel keys. 3 T ouch BAND to select a band. T ouch BAND repeatedly until the desired band is displayed, TV1 or TV2. 4 T o perform manual tuning, briefly touch c or d. # Y ou can also per form manual tuning by press- ing c or d ( TRACK). 5 T o perform seek tuning, keep touching c or d for about one second and release. The tuner will scan the channels until a broad- cast strong enough for good reception is found. # Y ou can cancel seek tuning by briefly touching either c or d. # If you keep touching c or d you can skip broadcasting channels. Seek tuning starts as soon as you release the keys. # Y ou can also per form seek tuning by pressing and holding c or d ( TRACK). Note If you do not use the touch panel keys within 30 seconds, they will be hidden automatically . Storing and recalling broadcast stations If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P01 to P12 you can easily store up to 12 broadcast stations for later recall with the touch of a key . ! Up to 24 stations, 12 for each of two TV bands, can be stored in memor y . A vailable accessories En 73 Section 04 A vailable accessories
1 T ouch LIST to display the preset list. # When the touch panel keys are not displayed, you can display them by touching the screen. 2 When you find a station that you want to store in memory , keep touching one of preset tuning keys P01 to P12 until the beep sounds. The next time you touch the same preset tun- ing key the station is recalled from memor y. # T o switch between P01 to P06 and P07 to P12 , touch PREV or NEXT . 3 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . Note Y ou can also use a and b to recall stations as- signed to preset tuning keys P01 to P12 . Storing the strongest broadcast stations sequentially 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch FUNCTION MENU to display the function names. 2 T ouch BSSM on the function menu to turn BSSM on. BSSM begins to flash. While BSSM is flashing the 12 strongest broadcast stations will be stored in order from the lowest channel up. When finished, BSSM stops flashing. # T o cancel the storage process, touch BSSM again. 3 T ouch ESC to return to the TV picture. # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Note Storing broadcast stations with BSSM may re- place broadcast stations you have saved using P01 to P12 . Digital Signal Processor Introduction of DSP adjustm ents Y ou can use this unit to control multi-channel processor (DEQ-P8000), which is sold sepa- rately . ! Some functions may differ depending on the multi-channel processor connected to this unit. Important When a multi-channel processor and an optional DVD player are connected to this unit, be sure to use an optical cable (e.g. CD-AD600). 1 DSP display Shows the DSP function names. By carr ying out the following settings/adjust- ments in the order shown, you can create a fi- nely-tuned sound field effortlessly . 1 Setting the speaker setting 2 Using the position selector 3 Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto- equalizing) 4 Adjusting the time alignment 5 Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone 6 Selecting a cross-over fre quency 7 Adjusting the speaker output levels 8 Adjusting 3-band parametric equalizer 1 T ouch AV MENU and then touch DSP MENU to display the DSP function names. The DSP function names are displayed and operable ones are highlighted. A vailable accessories En 74 Section 04
# T o go to the next group of function names, touch NEXT . # T o return to the previous group of function names, touch PREV . # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , you cannot use audio functions. Also, equalizer cur ve setting, POSITION , AUTO EQ and AUTO T A will be can- celed. # When playing discs recorded with more than 96 kHz sampling frequency , audio is outputted from front speakers only . # When selecting FM as the source, you cannot switch to SLA . # When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL . # When neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is se- lected in POSITION , you cannot switch to TIME ALIGNMENT . # When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker setting, you cannot switch to DOLBY PRO LOGIC II . 2 T ouch ESC to return to the ordinary dis- play . # T o return to the previous display , touch BACK . Using the sound field control The SFC function creates the sensation of a live performance. ! The acoustics of different per formance en- vironments are not the same and depend on the extent and contour of space through which sound waves move and on how sounds bounce off the stage, walls, floors and ceilings. At a live per formance you hear music in three stages: direct sound, early reflections, and late reflections, or re- verberations. Those factors are programed into the SFC circuitr y to recreate the acous- tics of various per formance settings. 1 Press EQ and hold to switch to SFC function. # T o switch to equalizer function, press EQ and hold again. 2 Press EQ to select the desired SFC mode. MUSICAL (musical) âÂÂDRAMA (drama) â ACTION (actio n) âÂÂJAZZ (jazz) âÂÂHALL (hall) â CLUB (club) âÂÂOFF (off) Note If the source is a 2-channel LPCM audio or a 2- channel Dolby Digital audio and you select SFC effects that are most applicable for 5.1-channel audio (i.e., MUSICAL , DRAMA or ACTION), we recommend turning Dolby Pro Logic II on. On the other hand, when selecting SFC effects that are intended for use with 2-channel audio (i.e., JAZZ , HALL or CLUB ), we recommend turning Dolby P ro Logic II off . Using the position selector One way to assure a more natural sound is to accurately position the stereo image, putting you right in the center of the sound field. The position selector function lets you automati- cally adjust the speaker output levels and in- serts a delay time to match the number and position of occupied seats. When used in con- junction with the SFC, the feature will make the sound image more natural and offer a pa- noramic sound that envelops you. 1 T ouch POSITION on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c / d / a/ b to select a listening po- sition. T ouch one of these, c/ d/ a/ b, to select a lis- tening position as listed in the table. Key Display Position c FRONT -L F ront seat left d FRONT -R F ront seat right a FRONT F ront seats b ALL All seats # T o cancel the selected listening position, touch the same key again. A vailable accessories En 75 Section 04 A vailable accessories
Note When you make adjustments to the listening po- sition, the speaker outputs are automatically set for appropriate levels. Y ou can tailor the levels more precisely referring to Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone or Adjusting the speaker output levels . Using balance adjustment Y ou can change the fader/balance setting so that it can provide the ideal listening environ- ment in all occupied seats. 1 T ouch FADER/BALANCE on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch a or b to adjust front/r ear speaker balance. Each time you touch a or b it moves the front/rear speaker balance towards the front or the rear . FRONT :25 to REAR:25 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to rear . # FR: 0 is the proper setting when only two speakers are used. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust left/right speak- er balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the lef t/ right speaker balance towards the lef t or the right. LEFT :25 to RIGHT :25 is displayed as the lef t/ right speaker balance moves from lef t to right. Adjusting source levels SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the volume level of each source to prevent ra- dical changes in volume when switching be- tween sources. ! Settings are based on the FM volume level, which remains unchanged. 1 Compare the FM volume level with the level of the source you wish to adjust. 2 T ouch SLA on the DSP function menu. 3 T ouch c or d to adjust the source vo- lume. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the source volume. 4 to âÂÂ4 is displayed as the source volume is increased or decreased. Notes ! The AM volume level can also be adjusted with source level adjustments. ! Video CD, CD, compressed audio and DivX are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! DVD and the optional DVD player are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! External unit 1 and external unit 2 are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . ! AUX (auxiliar y input) and AV (A V input) are set to the same source level adjustment volume automatically . Using the dynamic range control The dynamic range refers to the difference be- tween the largest and sof test sounds. The dy- namic range control compresses this difference so that you can clearly hear sounds even at low volume levels. ! The dynamic range control is effective only on Dolby Digital sounds. ! When playing other than the DVD disc, you cannot switch to DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL . 1 T ouch DYNAMIC RANGE CONTROL on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch d to turn the dynamic range con- trol on. # T o turn dynamic range control off , touch c. A vailable accessories En 76 Section 04
Using the down-mix function The down-mix function allows you to play back multi-channel audio in 2 channels. 1 T ouch DOWN MIX on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch c or d to select the desired level. ! Lo/Ro â Stereo mix the original audio that do not contain channel modes such as sur- round components. ! Lt/Rt â Down mix so that the surround components can be restored (decoded). Using the direct control Y ou can override audio settings to check for ef- fectiveness of your audio settings. ! All audio functions are locked out when the direct control is on except VOLUME/MUTE and DOLBY PRO LOGIC II . 1 T ouch DIGIT AL DIRECT on the DSP func- tion menu. 2 T ouch d to turn the direct control on. # T o turn direct control off , touch c. Using the Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II creates five full-bandwidth output channels from two-channel sources to achieve high-purity matrix surround. ! Dolby Pro Logic II supports up to 48 kHz sampling rate stereo source and has no ef- fect on other types of source. ! When both the center speaker and the rear speaker are set to OFF in the speaker set- ting, you cannot switch to DOLBY PRO LOGIC II . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch DOLBY PRO LOGIC II. 3 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the desired mode. ! MOVIE â The Movie mode suitable for movie playback ! MUSIC â The Music mode suitable for music playback ! MA TRIX â The Matrix mode for when FM radio reception is weak ! OFF â T urn Dolby P ro Logic II off ! MUSIC ADJUST â Adjust the Music mode # Y ou can operate MUSIC ADJUST only when MUSIC has been selected. Adjusting the Music mode Y ou can adjust the Music mode with the fol- lowing three controls. ! P anorama ( P ANORAMA ) extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for an exciting âÂÂwraparound â ef- fect. ! Dimension ( DIMENSION ) allows you to gradually adjust the sound field either to- wards the front or the rear . ! Center Width Control ( CENTER WIDTH) al- lows center-channel sounds to be posi- tioned between the center speaker and the left/right speakers. It improves the left-cen- ter-right stage presentation for both the dri- ver and the front passenger . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch DOLBY PRO LOGIC II. 3 T ouch MUSIC and then touch MUSIC ADJUST. # Y ou can operate MUSIC ADJUST only when MUSIC has been selected. 4 T ouch a or b to select P ANORAMA (pa- norama). Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: P ANORAMA (panorama) âÂÂDIMENSION (di- mension) â CENTER WIDTH (center width) 5 T ouch d to turn the panorama control on. # T o turn the panorama control off , touch c. A vailable accessories En 77 Section 04 A vailable accessories
6 T ouch b to select DIMENSION and then touch c or d to adjust front/surround speaker balance. Each time you touch c or d it moves the sound towards the front or the surrounds. 3 to âÂÂ3 is displayed as the front/rear speaker balance moves from front to surrounds. 7 T ouch b to select CENTER WIDTH and then touch c or d to adjust the center image. Each time you touch c or d it gradually spreads the center channel sound into the front lef t and right speakers over a range 0 to 7 . 3 is the default and it âÂÂs recommended for most recordings. 0 places all center sound in the center speaker . 7 places all center sound equally in the left/right speakers. Setting the speaker setting Y ou need to make with/without (or yes/no) and size (bass reproducing capacity) selection/ad- justments depending on the installed speak- ers. The size needs to be set to LARGE (large) if the speaker is capable of reproducing sounds of about 100 Hz or below . Other wise select SMALL (small). ! Low frequency range is not output if the subwoofer is set to OFF and the front and rear speakers set to SMALL or OFF . ! It is imperative that non-installed speakers be set to OFF . ! Set the front or rear speaker to LARGE if the speaker is capable of reproducing bass content, or if no subwoofer is installed. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch SPEAKER SETTING. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) âÂÂPHASE (subwoo- fer setting) # Y ou can switch to PHASE only when the sub- woofer has been set to ON . 4 T ouch c or d to select the correct size for the selected speaker . Each time you touch c or d selects the size in the following order: OFF (off) âÂÂSMALL (small) âÂÂLARGE (large) # Y ou cannot select OFF, when FRONT (front speakers) have been selected. # Y ou can select ON or OFF , when SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) has been selected. # Y ou can switch REVERSE (reverse phase) or NORMAL (normal phase), when PHASE (subwoo- fer setting) has been selected. Correcting the subwoofer â s phase If tr ying to boost the bass output of the sub- woofer doesn âÂÂt do much or rather makes you feel that the bass gets more murky , this may indicate that the subwoofer âÂÂs output and bass content you hear over other speakers cancel each other out. T o remove this problem, tr y changing the phase setting for the subwoofer . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch SPEAKER SETTING. 3 T ouch a or b to select SUB WOOFER (subwoofer). Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) âÂÂPHASE (subwoo- fer setting) 4 T ouch d to turn subwoofer output on. # T o turn subwoofer output off , touch c. 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the phase of subwoofer output. T ouch d to select normal phase and NORMAL appears in the display. T ouch c to select reverse phase and REVERSE appears in the display . A vailable accessories En 78 Section 04
Note When playing a 2-channel mono source with P ro Logic turned on, there may be occasions when the following will occur: ! No audio is outputted if the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE and no center speaker is installed. ! Audio is heard only over the center speaker if installed and the center speaker setting is SMALL or LARGE . Adjusting the speaker output levels Speaker level can be adjusted finely by listen- ing to an audio output. First, use test tone to adjust the approximate speaker level, and then use this function to adjust finely . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch SPEAKER LEVEL. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT R (front speaker right) â REAR R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR L (rear speaker left) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set to OFF . (Re fer to Setting the speaker setting on the previous page.) 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. Note T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker output levels at TEST TONE . Both provide the same results. Selecting a cross-over frequency Y ou can select a frequency , under which sounds are reproduced through the subwoo - fer . If the installed speakers include one whose size has been set to SMALL, you can select a frequency , under which sounds are repro - duced through a LARGE speaker or subwoo- fer . 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch CROSS OVER. 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT (front speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â REAR (rear speakers) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) 4 T ouch c or d to select cross-over fre- quency . Each time you touch c or d selects cross-over frequencies in the following order: 63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz âÂÂ160Hz â 200Hz Note Selecting a cross-over frequency is to set a cross- over frequency of the subwoofer âÂÂs L.P .F . (low-pass filter) and that of the SMALL speaker H.P .F . (high- pass filter). The cross-over frequency setting has no effect if the subwoofer is set to OFF and other speakers are set to LARGE or OFF . Adjusting the speaker output levels using a test tone This function allows you to easily get the over- all balance right among the speakers. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch TEST TONE. A vailable accessories En 79 Section 04 A vailable accessories
3 T ouch ST ART to start the test tone out- put. The test tone is outputted. It rotates from speaker to speaker in the following sequence at inter vals of about two seconds. The current settings for the speaker over which you hear the test tone are shown in the display. FRONT L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT R (front speaker right) â REAR R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR L (rear speaker left) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) Check each speaker output level. If no adjust- ments are needed, per form step 5 to stop the test tone. # The settings do not appear for speakers whose size is set to OFF . (Refer to Setting the speaker setting on page 78.) 4 T ouch c or d to adjust the speaker out- put level. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the speaker output level. 10 to â 10 is displayed as the level is increased or de- creased. # The test tone rotates to the next speaker after about two seconds from the last operation. 5 T ouch STOP to stop the test tone out- put. Notes ! If needed, select speakers and adjust their âÂÂab- solute â output levels. (Refer to Adjusting the speaker output levels on the previous page.) ! T o adjust the speaker output levels in this mode is the same as making the speaker out- put levels at SPEAKER LEVEL (speaker output level). Both provide the same results. Using the time alignment The time alignment lets you adjust the dis- tance between each speaker and the listening position. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT. 3 T ouch any of the following touch panel keys to select the time alignment. ! INITIAL â Initial time alignment (factor y set- ting) ! AUTO T A â Time alignment created by auto T A and EQ. (Refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto- time alignment and auto-equalizing) on page 82.) ! CUSTOM â Adjusted time alignment that you can create for yourself ! OFF â T urn the time alignment off ! ADJUSTMENT â Adjust the time alignment as desired # Y ou cannot select AUTO T A if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. # Y ou cannot select ADJUSTMENT when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . Adjusting the time alignment Y ou can adjust the distance between each speaker and the selected position. ! An adjusted time alignment is memorized in CUSTOM. 1 T ouch NEXT on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch TIME ALIGNMENT and then touch ADJUSTMENT. # Y ou cannot select ADJUSTMENT when neither FRONT -L nor FRONT -R is selected in POSITION . 3 T ouch a or b to select the speaker to be adjusted. Each time you touch a or b selects the speak- er in the following order: FRONT L (front speaker left) âÂÂCENTER (center speaker) â FRONT R (front speaker right) â REAR R (rear speaker right) âÂÂREAR L (rear speaker left) â SUB WOOFER (subwoofer) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set to OFF . (Re fer to Setting the speaker setting on page 78.) A vailable accessories En 80 Section 04
4 T ouch c or d to adjust the distance be- tween the selected speaker and the listen- ing position. Each time you touch c or d increases or de- creases the distance. 0.0inch to 200.0inch is displayed as the distance is increased or de- creased. Using the equalizer The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to match the car âÂÂs interior acoustic charac ter- istics as desired. Recalling equalizer curves There are seven stored equalizer cur ves which you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of the equalizer cur ves. Display Equalizer curve POWERFUL P ower ful NA TURAL Natural VOCAL V ocal FLA T Flat CUSTOM1 Custom 1 CUSTOM2 Custom 2 SUPER BASS Super bass ! CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 are adjusted equalizer cur ves. ! When FLA T is selected, no supplement or correction is made to the sound. This is useful to check the effect of the equalizer cur ves by switching alternatively between FLA T and a set equalizer cur ve. % Press EQ repeatedly to switch between the following equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂSUPER BASS Adjusting 3-band parametr ic equalizer Fo r CUSTOM1 and CUSTOM2 equalizer cur ves, you can adjust the front, rear and cen- ter equalizer cur ves separately by selecting a center frequency , an equalizer level and a Q factor for each band. ! A separate CUSTOM1 cur ve can be cre- ated for each source. ! A CUSTOM2 cur ve can be created com- mon to all sources. ! The center speaker largely determines the sound image and getting the balance right isn âÂÂt easy . W e recommend reproducing a 2- ch. audio (a CD for example) and getting the balance right among the speakers ex- cept for the center , and then reproducing a 5.1-ch. audio (Dolby Digital or DTS) and ad- justing the center speaker output to the balance you have already got among the other spea kers. 1 T ouch NEXT twice on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch P ARAMETRIC EQ. 3 T ouch a or b to select the desired item. Each time you touch a or b selects the item in the following order: EQ (equalizer) âÂÂSP-SELECT (speakers) â BAND (bands) âÂÂFREQUENCY (center fre- quency) â LEVEL (equalizer level) â Q. FACTOR (Q factor) 4 T ouch d to select the equalizer . T ouch d repeatedly to switch between the fol- lowing equalizers: POWERFUL âÂÂNA TURAL âÂÂVOCAL âÂÂFLA T â CUSTOM1 âÂÂCUSTOM2 âÂÂSUPER BASS 5 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the speaker to be adjusted. T ouch c or d until the desired speaker ap- pears in the display . REAR (rear speakers) âÂÂCENTER (center speak- er) â FRONT (front speakers) # Y ou cannot select speakers whose size is set to OFF . (Re fer to Setting the speaker setting on page 78.) 6 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the equalizer band to be adjusted. Each time you touch c or d selects equalizer bands in the following order: A vailable accessories En 81 Section 04 A vailable accessories
LOW (low) âÂÂMID (mid) âÂÂHIGH (high) 7 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the center frequency of selected band. T ouch c or d until the desired frequency ap- pears in the display . 40Hz âÂÂ50Hz âÂÂ63Hz âÂÂ80Hz âÂÂ100Hz âÂÂ125Hz â 160Hzâ 200Hzâ 250Hzâ 315Hzâ 400Hzâ 500Hz âÂÂ630Hz âÂÂ800Hz âÂÂ1kHz âÂÂ1.25kHz â 1.6kHz âÂÂ2kHz âÂÂ2.5kHz âÂÂ3.15kHz âÂÂ4kHz â 5kHz âÂÂ6.3kHz âÂÂ8kHz âÂÂ10kHz âÂÂ12.5kHz 8 T ouch b and then touch c or d to ad- just the equalizer level. Each time you touch c or d it increases or de- creases the equalizer level. 12 to â 12 is dis- played as the level is increased or decreased. 9 T ouch b and then touch c or d to se- lect the desired Q factor . Each time you touch c or d switches between the following Q factor: NARROW (narrow) âÂÂWIDE (wide) # Y ou can adjust parameters for each band of the other speakers in the same way . Note Y ou can select a center frequency for each band. Y ou can change the center frequency in 1/3-oc- tave steps, but you cannot select frequencies that have inter vals shorter than 1 octave among the center frequencies of the three bands. Using the auto-equalizer The auto-equalizer is the equalizer cur ve cre- ated by auto T A and EQ (refer to Auto T A and EQ (auto -time alignment and auto-equalizing) on this page). Y ou can turn the auto-equalizer on or off . 1 T ouch NEXT twice on the DSP function menu. 2 T ouch AUTO EQ. # Y ou cannot use this function if auto T A and EQ has not been carried out. 3 T ouch d to turn the auto-equalizer on. # T o turn auto -equalizer off , touch c. Auto T A and EQ (auto-time alignment and auto-equalizing) The auto-time alignment is automatically ad- justed for the distance between each speaker and the listening position. The auto-equalizer automatically measures the car interior acoustic characteristics, and then creates the auto-equalizer cur ve based on that information. WARNING T o prevent accidents, never carr y out auto T A and EQ while driving. When this function measures the car interior acoustic characteristics to create an auto-equalizer cur ve, a loud measurement tone (noise) may be outputted from the speakers. CAUTION ! Carr ying out auto T A and EQ under the follow- ing conditions may damage the speakers. Be sure to check the conditions thoroughly be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. â When speakers are incorrectly connected. (e.g., When a rear speaker is connected to a subwoofer output.) â When a speaker is connected to a power amp delivering output higher than the speaker âÂÂs maximum input power capabil- ity . ! If the microphone is placed in an unsuitable position the measurement tone may become loud and measurement may take a long time, resulting in a drain on batter y power . Be sure to place the microphone in the specified loca- tion. A vailable accessories En 82 Section 04
Before operating the auto T A and EQ function ! Carr y out auto T A and EQ in as quiet a place as possible, with the car engine and air conditioning switched off . Also cut power to car phones or portable telephones in the car , or remove them from the car be- fore carr ying out auto T A and EQ. Sounds other than the measurement tone (sur- rounding sounds, engine sound, tele- phones ringing etc.) may prevent correct measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! Be sure to carr y out auto T A and EQ using the supplied microphone. Using another microphone may prevent measurement, or result in incorrect measurement of the car interior acoustic characteristics. ! When front speaker is not connected, auto T A and EQ cannot be carried out. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with input level control, auto T A and EQ may not be possible if you lower power amp input level. Set the power amp âÂÂs input level to the standard position. ! When this unit is connected to a power amp with an LPF , turn off the LPF on the power amp before carr ying out auto T A and EQ. In addition, the cut-off frequency for built-in LPF of an active subwoofer should be set to the highest frequency . ! The time alignment value calculated by auto T A and EQ may differ from the actual distance in the following circumstances. However , the distance has been calculated by computer to be the optimum delay to give accurate results for the circum- stances, so please continue to use this value. â When the reflected sound within a vehi- cle is strong and delays occur . â When delays occur for low sounds due to the influence of the LPF on active subwoofers or external amps. ! Auto T A and EQ changes the audio settings as below: â The fader/balance settings return to the center position. (Refer to page 76.) â The equalizer cur ve switches to FLA T . (Refer to page 81.) â It will be adjusted automatically to high pass filter setting for front, center and rear speaker . ! If you carr y out auto T A and EQ when a pre- vious setting of this already exists, the set- ting will be replaced. Carrying out auto T A and EQ 1 Stop the car in a place that is as quiet as possible, close all doors, windows and the sun roof, and then turn the engine off. If the engine is left running, engine noise may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. 2 Fix the supplied microphone in the cen- ter of the headrest of the driver â s seat, fa- cing forward, using the belt (sold separately). The auto T A and EQ may differ depending on where you place the microphone. If desired, place the microphone on the front passenger seat to carr y out auto T A and EQ. 3 T ur n the ignition switch to ON or ACC. If the car âÂÂs air conditioner or heater is turned on, turn it off . Noise from the fan in the air conditioner or heater may prevent correct auto T A and EQ. # P ress SRC to turn the source on if this unit is turned off . A vailable accessories En 83 Section 04 A vailable accessories
4 Select the position for the seat on which the microphone is placed. Refer to Using the position selector on page 75. # If no position is selected before you start auto T A and EQ, FRONT -L is selected automatically . 5 Press SRC and hold until the unit turns off. 6 Press and hold EQ to enter the auto T A and EQ measurement mode. 7 Plug the microphone into the micro- phone input jack on the multi-channel pro- cessor . F or details concerning operation, refer to the multi-channel processor âÂÂs operation manual. 8 T ouch ST ART to start the auto T A and EQ. 9 Get out of the car and close the door within 10 seconds when the 10-second count-down starts. The measurement tone (noise) is outputted from the speakers, and auto T A and EQ be- gins. # When all speakers are connected, auto T A and EQ is completed in about nine minutes. # T o stop auto T A and EQ, touch STOP. # T o cancel auto T A and EQ on the way , touch BACK or ESC . 10 When auto T A and EQ is completed, Complete is displayed. When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible, an error message is displayed. (Refer to Under- standing auto T A and EQ error messages on page 89.) 11 T ouch ESC to cancel the auto T A and EQ mode. 12 Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment. Store the microphone carefully in the glove compartment or any other safe place. If the microphone is subjected to direct sunlight for an extended period, high temperatures may cause distortion, color change or mal- function. A vailable accessories En 84 Section 04
T roubleshooting Common Symptom Cause Action (See) P ower doesn âÂÂt turn on. The unit doesn âÂÂt operate. Leads and connecto rs are incor- rectly connected. Confirm once mor e that all connections are correct. The fuse is blown. Rectify the reason for the fuse blowing, then replace the fuse. Be ver y sure to install a fuse with the same rating. Noise and other factors are causing the built-in microprocess or to oper- ate incorrectly. P ress RESET . (P age 15) Operation with the remote con- trol isn â t possible. The unit does not operate cor- rectly even when the appropriate remote control buttons are pressed. The remote control operation mode is incorrect. Switch to the correc t remote control mode. The remote control code is incor- rect. Make sure the remote control selection switch setting and code type setting are the same. Batter y power is low . Load new batter y. Some operations are prohi bited with certain discs. Check by using another disc. Playback is not possible. The disc is dirty . Clean disc. (P age 90) The loaded disc is a type this unit cannot play. Check what type the disc is. Non compatible video system disc is loaded. Change to a disc compatible to your video system. No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Cables are not connected correctly. Connect the cables correctly . The unit is per forming still, slow mo - tion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no sound during still, slow motion or frame-by-frame playback. There is no picture. The parking brake cord is not con- nected. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The parking brake is not applied. Connect a parking brake cord, and apply the parking brake. The icon is displayed, and op- eration is not possibl e. The operation is prohibited for the disc. This operation is not possible. The operation is not compatible with the disc â s organization. This operation is not possible. The picture stops (pauses) and the unit cannot be operated. Reading of data has become impos- sible during playback . After stopping playback once, start playback once more. There is no sound. V olum e level is low . The volume level is low . Adjust the volume level. The attenuator is on. T urn the attenuator off . There is audio and video skip- ping. The unit is not firmly secured. Secure the unit firmly . The picture is stretched, the as- pect is incorrect. The aspect setting is incorrect for the display . Select the appropriate settin g for your display. (P age 39) When the ignition switch is turned ON (or turned to ACC), the motor sounds. The unit is confirming whether a disc is loaded or not. This is a normal operation. Additional Information En 85 Appendix Additional Information
Nothing is displayed. The touch pane l keys cannot be used. The rear view camera is not con- nected. CAMERA POLARITY is at incorrect setting. Connect a rear view camera. P ress and hold VO LUME/MUTE to return to the source display and then select the correct setting for CAMERA POLARITY . (Page 47) Problems during DVD playback Symptom Cause Action (See) Playback is not possible. The loaded disc has a different re- gion number from this unit. Replace the disc with one featuring the same region number as this unit. (P age 9, P age 100) A parental lock message is dis- played and playback is not pos- sible. P arental lock is on. T urn parental lock off or change the level. (P age 40) P arental lock cannot be can- celed. The code number is incorrect. Input the correct code number . (P age 40) Y ou have forgotten your code num- ber . T ouch C 10 times to cancel the code number . (P age 40) Dialog language (and subtitle language) cannot be switched. The DVD playing does not feature multiple language recordings. Y ou cannot switch among multiple languages if they are not recorded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. No subtitles are displayed. The DVD playing does not feature subtitles. Subtitles are not displayed if they are not re- corded on the disc. Y ou can only switch between items indicated in the disc menu. Switch using the disc menu. Playback is not with the audio language and subti tle language settings selected in DVD SETUP . The DVD playing does not feature dialog or subtitles in the language selected in DVD SETUP . Switching to a sel ected language is not possi- ble if the language selected in DVD SETUP is not recorded on the disc. Switching the viewing angle is not possible. The DVD playing does not feature scenes shot from multiple angles. Y ou cannot switch between multiple angles if the DVD does not feature scenes reco rded from multiple angles. Y ou are tr ying to switch to multiple angle viewing of a scene that is not recorded from multiple angles. Switch between multiple angles when watch- ing scenes recorded from multiple angles. The picture is extremel y unclear/ distorted and dark during play- back. The disc features a signal to prohibit copying. (Some discs may have this.) Since this unit is compatible with the copy guard analog copy protect system, when play- ing a disc that has a signal prohibitin g copy- ing, the picture may suffer from horizon tal stripes or other imper fections when viewed on some displays. This does not mean this unit is malfunctioning. Problems during Video CD playback Symptom Cause Action The PBC (playback control) menu display cannot be called up. The Video CD playing does not fea- ture PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs not featuring PBC. Repeat play and track/time search are not possible. The Video CD playing features PBC. This operation is not possible with Video CDs featuring PBC. Additional Information En 86 Appendix
Problems during iPod playback Symptom Cause Action iP od doesn âÂÂt operate correctly . Cables are incorrectly connected. Disconnect the cable from iP od. Once iPod main menu is displayed, connect the cable again. Reset the iP od. The iP od version is old. Update the iPod version. Problems during multi-channel processor connection Symptom Cause Action (See) No sounds are heard. The volume level will not rise. Optical cables are not connected correctly . Connect the cables correctly . Even if multi-channel audio is selected, 2-channel audio is out- put. Digital output setting is set to Line- ar PCM . Normally , set the digital output setting to STREAM . (P age 41) Error messages When you contact your dealer or your nearest Pioneer Ser vice Center , be sure to have the error message recorded. Built-in DVD player Message Cause Action DIFFERENT REGION DISC (R ERROR) The disc does not have the same re- gion number as this unit Replace the DVD video with one bearing the correct region number . ERROR-02-XX Dirty disc Clean disc. Scratched disc Replace disc. The disc is loaded upside down Check that the disc is loaded correctly. Electrical or me chanical P ress RESET . NON-PLA Y ABLE DISC (NON- PLA Y) This type of disc cannot be played by this unit Replace the disc with one this unit can play . The inserted disc does not contain any files that can be played ba ck Replace disc. PROTECT All the files on the inserted disc are secured by DRM Replace disc. SKIPPED The inserted disc contains WMA files that are protec ted by DRM Replace disc. TEMP The temperature of this unit is out- side the normal operating range W ait until the unit âÂÂs tempera ture returns to within normal operating limits. Additional Information En 87 Appendix Additional Information
USB audio player/USB memory Message Cause Action NO AUDIO No songs T ransfer the audio files to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y and connect. USB memor y with security enabled is connected F ollow the USB memor y instructions to dis- able the security. NO DEVICE The USB storage device is not con- nected to the USB port of this unit. Connect a compatible USB storage device. SKIPPED The connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y contains WMA files that are protec ted by Windows Media ⢠DRM 9/10 Play an audio file no t prot ected by Windows Media DRM 9/10. PROTECT All the files on the connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y are protected by Windows Media DRM 9/10 T ransfer audio files not protec ted by Windows Media DRM 9/10 to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y and connect. N/A USB The USB device connected to is not supported by this unit. Connect a USB portable audio player or USB memor y that is USB Mass Storage Class compliant. CHECK USB The USB connecto r or USB cable is short-circuited. Confirm that the USB connector or USB cable is not caught in something or da- maged. The connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y consumes more than 500 mA (maxim um allow- able current). Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memor y and do not use it. T urn the igni- tion switch to OF F , then to ACC or ON and then connect the compliant USB portable audio player/USB memor y. ERROR-19 Communication failure P er form one of the following operations. â T urn the ignition switch OFF and back ON. â Disconnect the USB portable audio player/ USB memor y . â Change to a different source. Then, return to the USB portable audio player/USB memor y . ERROR-23 USB device is not formatted with F A T16 or FA T32 USB device should be formatted with F A T16 or FA T32. iPod Message Cause Action ERROR-11 Communication failure Disconnect the cable from iP od. Once iPod main menu is displayed, connect the cable again. Reset the iP od. ERROR-21 Old version of iP od Update the iPod version. ERROR-30 iP od failure Reset the iP od. STOP No songs in the current list Select a list that contains the songs. No songs T ransfer the songs to iPod. Additional Information En 88 Appendix
iP od is not charged but operate s correctly Check if the connection cable for iP od shorted out (e.g., not caught in metal ob- jects). After checking, turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON or disconnect the iP od and connect again. The connected USB portable audio player/USB memor y consumes more than 500 mA (maxim um allow- able current). Check if the connection cable for iP od shorted out (e.g., not caught in metal ob- jects). After checking, turn the ignition switch OFF and back ON or disconnect the iP od and connect again. Error has occurr ed when connect- ing the iPod to this unit Reconnect the iP od. T urn the ignition switch to OFF , then to ACC or ON. Update the iPod version. Understanding auto T A and EQ error messages When correct measurement of car interior acoustic characteristics is not possible using the auto T A and EQ, an error message may appear on the display. If an error message appears, refer to the table below to see what the problem is and the suggested method of correcting the problem. Af ter checking, tr y again. Message Cause Action Error . Please check MIC. Microphone is not connected. Plug the supplied microphone securely into the jack. Error . Please check front SP . , Error . Please check FL SP . , Error . Please check FR SP . , Error . Please check center SP . , Error . Please check rear SP . , Error . Please check RL SP . , Error . Please check RR SP . , Error . Please check subwoofer The microphone cannot pick up the measuring tone of a speaker . ! Confirm that the speakers are connected correctly . ! Correct the input level setting of the power amp connected to the speakers. ! Set the mic rophone corr ectly . Error . Please check noise. The surrounding noise level is too high. ! Stop your car in a place that is as quiet as possible, and switch off the engine, air condi- tioner or heater . ! Set the mic rophone corr ectly . Additional Information En 89 Appendix Additional Information
Handling guideline of discs and player ! Use only conventional, fully circular discs. Do not use shaped discs. ! Use 12-cm or 8-cm disc. Do not use an adapter when playing 8-cm discs. ! Do not insert anything other than a disc into the disc loading slot. Discs which can be played back are listed in the following section. Refer to Playable discs on page 9. ! Do not use cracked, chipped, warped, or otherwise damaged discs as they may da- mage the player . ! Do not touch the recorded sur face of the discs. ! Store discs in their cases when not in use. ! Avoid leaving discs in excessively hot envir- onments including under direct sunlight. ! Do not attach labels, write on or apply che- micals to the sur face of the discs. ! T o clean a disc, wipe the disc with a soft cloth outward from the center . ! Condensation may temporarily impair the player â s per formance. Leave it to adjust to the warmer temperature for about one hour . Also, wipe any dump discs with a soft cloth. ! Playback of discs may not be possible be- cause of disc characteristics, disc format, recorded application, playback environ- ment, storage conditions, and so on. ! Road shocks may interrupt disc playback. ! Read the precautions for discs before using them. DVD discs ! With some DVD video discs, it may not be possible to use certain functions. ! It may not be possible to play back some DVD video discs. ! It is not possible to play back DVD -ROM/ DVD-RAM discs. DVD-R/DVD-RW discs ! Unfinalized DVD-R/-RW discs which have been recorded with the V ideo format (video mode) cannot be played back. ! DVD-R/-RW discs which have been re- corded with the Video Recording format (VR mode) cannot be played back. ! F or more information about recording mode, please contact manufacture of DVD recorder or application. A VCHD recorded discs ! This unit is not compa tible with discs re- corded in AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition) format. Do not insert AVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc may not be ejected. CD-R/CD-RW discs ! When CD -R/CD-RW discs are used, play- back is possible only for discs which have been finalized. ! It may not be possible to play back CD-R/ CD-RW discs recorded on a music CD re- corder or a personal computer because of disc charac teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc., on the lens of this unit. ! Playback of discs recorded on a personal computer may not be possible, depending on the application settings and the environ- ment. Please record with the correct for- mat. (F or details, contact the manufacturer of the application.) Additional Information En 90 Appendix
! Playback of CD-R/CD -RW discs may be- come impossible in case of direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures, or the sto- rage conditions in the vehicle. ! Titles and other text information recorded on a CD-R/CD -RW disc may not be dis- played by this unit (in the case of audio data (CD-DA)). ! Read the precautions with CD -R/CD-RW discs before using them. Dual Discs ! Dual Discs are two-sided discs that have a recordable CD for audio on one side and a recordable DVD for video on the other . ! Playback of the DVD side is possible with this unit. However , since the CD side of Dual Discs is not physically compatible with the general CD standard, it may not be possible to play the CD side with this unit. ! F requent loading and ejecting of a Dual Disc may result in scratches on the disc. Serious scratches can lead to playback pro- blems on this unit. In some cases, a Dual Disc may become stuck in the disc loading slot and will not eject. T o prevent this, we recommend you refrain from using Dual Disc with this unit. ! Please refer to the information from the disc manufacturer for more detailed infor- mation about Dual Discs. Compressed au dio files on the disc ! Depending on the version of Windows Media ⢠Player used to encode WMA files, album names and other text information may not be correctly displayed. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data. ! ISO 9660 Level 1 and 2 compliant. Romeo and Joliet file systems are both compatible with this player . ! Multi-session playback is possible. ! Compressed audio files are not compatible with packet write data transfer . ! Only 64 characters from the beginning can be displayed as a file name (including the extension such as .wma or .mp3) or a folder name. ! F older selection sequence or other opera- tion may be altered depending on the en- coding or writing sof tware. ! Regardless of the length of blank section between the songs of original recording, compressed audio discs play with a short pause between songs. ! File extensions such as .wma, .mp3 or .m4a must be used properly . Example of a hierarchy : Folder : Compressed audio file 1 2 3 4 5 6 L e v e l 1 L e v e l 2 L e v e l 3 L e v e l 4 ! This unit assigns folder numbers. The user cannot assign folder numbers. ! It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on one disc. Additional Information En 91 Appendix Additional Information
Compressed audio compatibility WMA ! Compatible format: WMA encoded by Windows Media Player ! Bit rate: 5 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Windows Media Audio 9 P rofessional, Loss- less, V oice: No MP3 ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz (8 kHz to 48 kHz for emphasis) ! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 (ID3 tag V ersion 2.x is given priority than V ersion 1.x.) ! M3u playlist: No ! MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: No AAC ! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iT unes ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR) ! VBR : No ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 44.1 kHz ! Apple Lossless: No USB audio player/USB memory USB audio player/USB memory compatibility ! USB version: 2.0, 1.1 and 1.0 ! USB data transfer rate: full speed ! USB Class: MSC (Mass Storage Class) de- vice ! P rotocol: bulk ! Minimum amount of memor y : 250 MB ! Maximum amount of memor y : 250 GB ! File system: F A T32 and F A T16 ! Supply current: 500 mA Notes ! P artitioned USB memor y is not compatible with this unit. ! Depending on the kind of USB portable audio player/USB memory you use, this unit may not recognize the USB audio player/USB memor y or audio files may not be played back properly . ! This unit can play back files in the USB porta- ble audio player/USB memory that is USB Mass Storage Class. However , copyright pro- tected files that are stored in above-mentioned USB devices cannot be played back. ! Y ou cannot connect a USB portable audio player/USB memory to this unit via a USB hub. USB audio player/USB memory ! Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memor y in direct sunlight for extended amounts of time. Extended expo- sure to direct sunlight can result in USB portable audio player/USB memor y mal- function due to the resul ting high tempera- ture. ! Do not leave the USB portable audio player/USB memor y in high temperature. ! Firmly secure the USB portable audio player/USB memor y when driving. Do not let the USB portable audio player/USB memor y fall onto the floor , where it may be- come jammed under the brake or accelera- tor pedal. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files encoded with image data. ! Depending on the USB devices connected to this unit, it may generate noise in the radio. ! Only 22 characters from the beginning can be displayed as a file name (including the extension) or a folder name when USB por- table audio player/USB memor y is selected as a source. ! The text information of some audio files may not be correctly displayed. ! File extensions must be used properly . ! Up to 15 000 files on a USB portable audio player/USB memor y can be played back. ! Up to 500 folders on a USB portable audio player/USB memor y can be played back. Additional Information En 92 Appendix
! Up to eight tiers director y on a USB porta- ble audio player/USB memor y can be played back. ! There may be a slight delay when starting playback of audio files on a USB portable audio player/USB memor y with numerous folder hierarchies. ! Do not connect anything other than the USB portable audio player/USB memor y . ! Operations may var y depending on the kind of USB audio player and a USB mem- or y . The sequence of audio files on USB memory F or USB portable audio players, the sequence is different from that of USB memor y and de- pends on the player . Example of a hierarchy : Folder : Compressed audio file 1 2 3 4 5 6 L e v e l 1 L e v e l 2 L e v e l 3 L e v e l 4 ! 01 to 05 represent assigned folder num- bers. 1 to 6 represent the playback se- quence. The user cannot assign folder numbers and specif y the playback se- quence with this unit. ! Playback sequence of the audio file is the same as recorded sequence in the USB de- vice. ! T o specify the playback sequence, the fol- lowing method is recommended. 1 Create the file name including numbers that specify the playback sequence (e.g., 001xxx.mp3 and 099yyy .mp3). 2 P ut those files into a folder . 3 Record the folder containing files into the USB device. However , depending on the system environ- ment, you cannot specify the file playback sequence. Compressed audio compatibility WMA ! Compatible format: WMA encoded by Windows Media Player ! Bit rate: 48 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), 48 kbps to 384 kbps (VBR) ! Sampling frequency: 32 kHz to 48 kHz ! Windows Media Audio 9 P rofessional, Loss- less, V oice: No MP3 ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps ! Sampling frequency: 16 kHz to 48 kHz (32, 44.1, 48 kHz for emphasis) ! Compatible ID3 tag version: 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3, 2.4 (ID3 tag V ersion 2.x is given priority than Version 1.x.) ! M3u playlist: No ! MP3i (MP3 interactive), mp3 PRO: No AAC ! Compatible format: AAC encoded by iT unes ! Sampling frequency: 11.025 kHz to 48 kHz ! T ransmission rate: 16 kbps to 320 kbps ! Apple Lossless: No WA V ! Compatible format: Linear PCM (LPCM), MS ADPCM ! Quantization bits: 8 and 16 (LPCM), 4 (MS ADPCM) ! Sampling frequency: 16 kHz to 48 kHz (LPCM), 22.05 kHz to 44.1 kHz (MS AD - PCM) Additional Information En 93 Appendix Additional Information
DivX video files ! Depending on the file information composi- tion such as the number of audio stream, there may be a slight delay in the start of playback on discs. ! Some special operation may be prohibited because of the composition of DivX files. ! DivX files downloaded only from DivX part- ner site are guarantee of proper operation. Unauthorized DivX file may not operate properly . ! DRM rental file cannot be operated until starting playing back. ! This unit corresponds to a DivX file display up to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also, search operation beyond this time limit is prohibited. ! If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback is stopped on the way. ! DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of this unit to DivX VOD provider . About ID code, refer to Displaying your DivX î VOD re- gistration code on page 41. ! File extensions such as .avi or .divx must be used properly. ! F or more details about DivX, visit the follow- ing site: http://www .divx.com/ DivX compatibility ! Compatible format: DivX video format im- plemented in relation to DivX standards ! DivX Ultra format: No ! DivX files without video data: No ! Compatible audio codec: MP2, MP3, Dolby Digital ! LPCM: No ! Bit rate: 8 kbps to 320 kbps (CBR), VBR ! Sampling frequency: 8 kHz to 48 kHz ! Compatible external subtitle file extension: .srt About handling the iPod CAUTION ! P ioneer accepts no responsibility for data lost on the iP od even if that data is lost while using this unit. ! Do not leave the iP od in direct sunlight for ex- tended amounts of time. Extended exposure to direct sunlight can result in iP od malfunc- tion due to the resulting high temperature. ! Do not leave the iP od in a high temperature. ! Firmly secure the iPod when driving. Do not let the iP od fall onto the floor , where it may be- come jammed under the brake or accelerator pedal. F or details, refer to the iP od âÂÂs manuals. About iPod settings ! Y ou cannot operate the iP od Equalizer on P ioneer products. W e recommend that you set the iP od Equalizer to off , before con- necting to this unit. ! Y ou cannot set Repeat to off on the iP od when using this unit. Even if you set Repeat to off on the iP od, Repeat is automatically changed to All when connecting the iP od to this unit. Using the display correctly CAUTION ! If liquid or foreign matter should get inside this unit, turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station . Do not use the unit in this condition because doing so may result in fire, electric shock, or other failure. ! If you notice smoke, a strange noise or smell, or any other abnormal signs from the display , turn off the power immediately and consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station . Using this unit in this condition may result in permanent da- mage to the system. Additional Information En 94 Appendix
! Do not disassemble or modify this unit, as there are high-voltage components inside which may cause electric shock. Be sure to consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Service Station for internal inspec- tion, adjustments, or repairs. Handling the display ! When the display is subjected to direct sun- light for a long period of time, it will be- come very hot resulting in possible damage to the LCD screen. When not using this unit, close the display and avoid exposing it to direct sunlight. ! The display should be used within the tem- perature ranges shown below . Storage temperature range: -4 ðF to 176 ðF At temperatures higher or lower than the operating temperature range, the display may not operate normally . ! The LCD screen is exposed in order to in- crease its visibility within the vehicle. Please do not press strongly on it as this may damage it. ! Do not place anything on the display when it is opened. Also, do not attempt to carr y out angle adjustment, or open/close the display by hand. Applying strong force to the display may damage it. ! Do not push the LCD screen forcefully as this may scratch it. ! Be careful not to place anything between the display and the main body when the display is opening or closing. If an object gets between the display and main body , the display may stop working. ! Be careful of fingers, long hair , and loose articles of clothing which could possibly get caught between the display and the main body and cause serious injur y . Liquid crystal display (LCD) screen ! If the display is near the vent of an air con- ditioner when it is opened, make sure that air from the air conditioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater may damage the LCD screen, and cool air from the cool- er may cause moisture to form inside the display resulting in possible damage. Also, if the display is cooled down by the cooler , the screen may become dark, or the life span of the small fluorescent tube used in- side the display may be shortened. ! Small black dots or white dots (bright dots) may appear on the LCD screen. These are due to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do not indicate a problem with the display . ! At low temperatures, the LCD screen may be dark for a while after the power is turned on. ! The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is exposed to direct sunlight. ! When using a portable phone, keep the an- tenna of the portable phone away from the display to prevent disruption of the video by the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc. Keeping the display in good condition ! When removing dust from the screen or cleaning the display , first turn the system power off , then wipe with a soft dr y cloth. ! When wiping the screen, take care not to scratch the sur face. Do not use harsh or abrasive chemical cleaners. Small fluorescent tube ! A small fluorescent tube is used inside the display to illuminate the LCD screen. â The fluorescent tube should last for ap- proximately 10 000 hours, depending on operating conditions. (Using the display at low temperatures reduces the ser vice life of the fluorescent tube.) Additional Information En 95 Appendix Additional Information
â When the fluorescent tube reaches the end of its useful life, the screen will be dark and the image will no longer be projected. If this happens, consult your dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER Ser vice Station. Additional Information En 96 Appendix
Language code chart for DVD Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Language (code), input code Japanese (ja), 1001 Guarani (gn), 0714 P ashto, Pushto (ps), 1619 English (en), 0514 Gujarati (gu), 0721 Quechua (qu), 1721 F rench (fr), 0618 Hausa (ha), 0801 Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813 Spanish (es), 0519 Hindi (hi), 0809 Kirundi (rn), 1814 German (de), 0405 Croatian (hr), 0818 Romanian (ro), 1815 Italian (it), 0920 Hungarian (hu), 0821 Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823 Chinese (zh), 2608 Armenian (hy), 0825 Sanskrit (sa), 1901 Dutch (nl), 1412 Interlingua (ia), 0901 Sindhi (sd), 1904 P ortugues e (pt), 1620 Interlingue (ie), 0905 Sangho (sg), 1907 Swedish (sv), 1922 Inupiak (ik), 0911 Serbo- Croatian (sh), 1908 Russian (ru), 1821 Indonesian (in), 0914 Sinhalese (si), 1909 Korean (ko), 1115 Icelandic (is), 0919 Slovak (sk), 1911 Greek (el), 0512 Hebrew (iw), 0923 Slovenian (sl), 1912 Afar (aa), 0101 Yiddish (ji), 1009 Samoan (sm), 1913 Abkhazian (ab), 0102 Javanese (jw), 1023 Shona (sn), 1914 Afrikaans (af), 0106 Georgian (ka), 1101 Somali (so), 1915 Amharic (am), 0113 Kazakh (kk), 1111 Albanian (sq), 1917 Arabic (ar), 0118 Greenlandic (kl), 1112 Serbian (sr), 1918 Assamese (as), 0119 Cambodian (km), 1113 Siswati (ss), 1919 Aymara (ay), 012 5 Kannada (kn), 1114 Sesotho (st), 1920 Azerbaijani (az), 0126 Kashmiri (ks), 1119 Sundanese (su), 1921 Bashkir (ba), 0201 Kurdish (ku), 1121 Swahili (sw), 1923 Byelorussian (be), 0205 Kirghiz (ky), 1125 T amil (ta), 2001 Bulgarian (bg), 0207 Latin (la), 1201 T elugu (te), 2005 Bihari (bh), 0208 Lingala (ln), 1214 T ajik (tg), 2007 Bislama (bi), 0209 Laothian (lo), 1215 Thai (th), 2008 Bengali (bn), 0214 Lithuan ian (lt), 1220 Tigrinya (ti), 2009 Tibetan (bo), 0215 Latvian (lv), 1222 T urkmen (tk), 2011 Breton (br), 0218 Malagasy (mg), 1307 T agalog (tl), 2012 Catalan (ca), 0301 Maori (mi), 1309 Setswana (tn), 2014 Corsican (co), 0315 Macedonian (mk), 1311 T on ga (to) , 2015 Czech (cs), 0319 Malayalam (ml), 1312 T urkish (tr), 2018 W elsh (cy), 0325 Mongolian (mn), 1314 T songa (ts), 2019 Danish (da), 0401 Moldavian (mo), 1315 T atar (tt), 2020 Bhutani (dz), 0426 Marathi (mr), 1318 T wi (tw), 2023 Esperanto (eo), 0515 Malay (ms), 1319 Ukrainian (uk), 2111 Estonian (et), 0520 Maltese (mt), 1320 Urdu (ur), 2118 Basque (eu), 0521 Burme se (my), 1325 Uzbek (uz), 2126 P ersian (fa), 0601 Nauru (na), 1401 Vietnamese (vi), 2209 Finnish (fi), 0609 Nepali (ne), 1405 V olapük (vo), 2215 Fiji (fj), 0610 Norwegian (no), 1415 Wo l o f ( w o ) , 2315 F aroese (fo), 0615 Occitan (oc), 1503 Xhosa (xh), 2408 F risian (fy), 0625 Oromo (om ), 1513 Y oruba (yo), 2515 Irish (ga), 0701 Oriya (or), 1518 Zulu (zu ), 2621 Scots-Gaelic (gd), 0704 P anjabi (pa), 1601 Galician (gl), 0712 Polish (pl) , 1612 Additional Information En 97 Appendix Additional Information
T erms AAC AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio compression technology standard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Aspect ratio This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture for exceptional presence and atmosphere. Bit rate This expresses data volume per second, or bps (bits per second) units. The higher the rate, the more information is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the better the sound. Chapter DVD titles are in turn divided into chapters which are numbered in the same way as the chapters of a book. Wi th DVD video discs fea- turing chapters, you can quickly find a desired scene with chapter search. DivX DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc. DivX media files contain highly com- pressed video with high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file size. DivX files can also include advanced media features like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks. Many DivX media files are available for down- load online, and you can create your own using your personal content and easy-to -use tools from DivX.com. DivX Certified DivX Certified products are officially tested by the creators of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX video, including DivX 6. Dolby Digital Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to 5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby Digital surround sound system used in theaters. Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II can create five full-band- width output channels from two-channel sources. This new technology enables a dis- crete 5-channel playback with 2 front chan- nels, 1 center channel, and 2 rear channels. A music mode is also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the movie mode. DTS This stands for Digital Theater Systems. DTS is a surround system delivering multi-channel audio from up to 6 independent channels. Dynamic range control Dolby Digital has a function for compressing the difference between the loudest and softest sounds: Dynamic range control. This control ensures sounds with an increased dynamic range are heard clearly even at low volume le- vels. ID3 tag This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. This embedded in- formation can include the track title, the ar- tist âÂÂs name, the album title, the music genre, the year of production, comments and other data. The contents can be freely edited using software with ID3 T ag editing functions. Although the tags are restricted as to the num- ber of characters, the information can be viewed when the track is played back. ISO9660 format This is the international standard for the for- mat logic of CD-ROM folders and files. F or the ISO9660 format, there are regulations for the following two levels. Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (the name con- sists of up to 8 characters, half-byte English capital letters and half-byte numerals and the â _â sign, with a file-extension of three charac- ters). Additional Information En 98 Appendix
Level 2: The file name can have up to 31 characters (in- cluding the separation mark âÂÂ. â and a file ex- tension). Each folder contains less than 8 hierarchies. Extended formats Joliet: File names can have up to 64 characters. Romeo: File names can have up to 128 characters. Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is the signal recording system used for music CDs and DVDs. Generally , DVDs are re- corded with higher sampling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs can provide higher sound quality . m3u Playlists created using the â WINAMP â soft- ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u). MP3 MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio compression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the ISO (International Stan- dards Orga nization). MP3 is able to compress audio data to about 1/10th the level of a con- ventional disc. MPEG This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an international video image compression standard. Some DVDs feature di- gital audio compressed and recorded using this system. Multi-angle With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV . Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles, let- ting you choose your viewing angle as desired. Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog) Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multi- ple languages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on a single disc, letting you choose as desired. Multi-session Multi-session is a recording method that al- lows additional data to be recorded later . When recording data on a CD-ROM, CD -R or CD-RW , etc., all data from beginning to end is treated as a single unit or session. Multi-ses- sion is a method of recording more than 2 ses- sions on one disc. Multi-subtitle Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be re- corded on a single DVD, letting you choose as desired. Optical digital output/input By transmitting and receiving audio signals in a digital signal format, the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of transmis- sion is minimized. An optical digital output/ input is designed to transmit and receive digi- tal signals optically . Packet write This is a general term for a method of writing on CD -R , etc., at the time required for a file, just as is done with files on floppy or hard discs. Parental lock Some DVD video discs with violent or adult- or- iented scenes feature parental lock which pre- vents children from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you set the unit âÂÂs parental lock level, playback of scenes inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these scenes will be skipped. Additional Information En 99 Appendix Additional Information
Playback control (PBC) This is a playback control signal recorded on Video CDs (V ersion 2.0). Using menu displays provided by Video CDs with PBC lets you enjoy playback of simple interactive sof tware and software with search functions. Y ou can also enjoy viewing high- and standard-resolution still images. Region number DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indicating the area in which they were purchased. Playback of a DVD is not pos- sible unless it features the same region num- ber as the DVD player . Title DVD video discs have high data capacity , en- abling recording of multiple movies on a sin- gle disc. If , for example, one disc contains three separate movies, they are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you enjoy the convenience of title search and other func- tions. VBR VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexibly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of audio compres- sion, it is possible to achieve compression- priority sound quality . WMA WMA is short for Wi ndows Media ⢠Audio and refers to an audio compression technol- ogy that is developed by Microsoft Corporation . WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media Player version 7 or later . Windows Media and the Windows logo are tra- demarks or registered trademarks of Microsof t Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Additional Information En 100 Appendix
Specifications General Po w e r s o u r c e ............................. 14.4 V DC (10.8 V to 15.1 V allowable) Grounding system ................... N e g ative type Max. current consu mption ..................................................... 10.0 A Dimensions (W àH àD): DIN Chassis ..................... 1 8 0 m m à5 0 m m à1 6 5 mm (7-1/8 in. à2 in. à6-1/2 in.) N o s e ........................... 1 8 8 m m à5 8 m m à3 3 m m (7-3/8 in.à2-1/4 in.à1-1/4 in.) D Chassis ..................... 1 7 8 m m à5 0 m m à1 6 5 mm (7 in.à2 in.à6-1/2 in.) N o s e ........................... 1 7 0 m m à4 6 m m à2 8 m m (6-3/4 in.à1-3/4 in.à1-1/8 in.) We i g h t .......................................... 2 . 4 k g (5.3 lbs) Display Screen size/aspect ratio ....... 7 . 0 i n c h w i d e / 1 6 : 9 (effective display area: 154 à87 mm) P ixels ............................................. 3 3 6 9 6 0 ( 1 4 4 0 à234) D i s p l a y m e t h o d ........................ T F T a c t i v e m a t r i x , t r a n s m i s - sive type Color system .............................. N T S C Durable temperature ran ge (power off) ..................................................... - 4 ð F t o 1 7 6 ð F Angle adjustment .................... 5 0 ð t o 110ð (initial settings: 90ð) Audio Maximum power output ....... 5 0 W à4 50 W à2/4 W 70 W à1/2 W (for subwoofer) Continuous power output . .. 22 W à4 (50 Hz to 15 000 Hz, 5 % THD, 4 W load, both channels driven) Load impedance ...................... 4 W to 8 W ÃÂ4 4 W to 8 W ÃÂ2 2 W ÃÂ1 Pr e o u t m a x o u t p u t l e v e l ....... 4 . 0 V Equalizer (3-Band P arametric Equalizer): Low Fr e q u e n c y ................ 40/80/100/160 Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/ 0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ 1 2 d B Mid Fr e q u e n c y ................ 200/500/1k/2k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/ 0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ 1 2 d B High Fr e q u e n c y ................ 3.15k/8k/10k/12.5k Hz Q Fa c t o r .................... 0.35/0.59/ 0.95/1.15 ( 6 dB when boosted) G a i n ............................ ñ 1 2 d B HPF : Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz S l o p e .................................... â 12 dB/oct Subwoofer (mono): Fr e q u e n c y .......................... 50/63/80/100/125 Hz S l o p e .................................... â 18 dB/oct G a i n ...................................... 6 d B t o â 24 dB Phase .................................. N o r m al/Reverse Bass boost: G a i n ...................................... 1 2 d B t o 0 d B DVD Player System .......................................... D V D v i d e o , V i d e o C D , C D , WMA, MP3, AAC, DivX sys- tem U s a b l e d i s c s .............................. D V D v i d e o , V i d e o C D , C D , CD-R/RW , DVD -R/RW/RDL Region number ........................ 1 Fr e q u e n c y r e s p o n s e ............... 5 H z t o 4 4 0 0 0 H z ( w i t h DVD, at sampling frequency 96 kHz) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 9 6 d B ( 1 k H z ) ( I H F - A n e t - work) (RCA level) Output level: V i d e o .................................... 1 . 0 V p -p/75 W (ñ0.2 V) Number of channels .............. 2 ( s t e r e o ) M P 3 d e c o d i n g f o r m a t ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 WMA decoding forma t ......... V e r . 7 , 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding forma t ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iT unes en- coded only) (.m4a) (V er . 8.0 and earlier) DivX decoding forma t ............ Home Theater Ver . 3, 4, 5.2 (.avi, .divx) USB USB standard specification ..................................................... U S B 2 . 0 f u l l s p e e d Maximum current supply .... 5 0 0 m A U S B C l a s s ................................... M S C ( M a s s S torage Class) File system .................................. FAT16, F A T32 M P 3 d e c o d i n g f o r m a t ........... MPEG -1 & 2 Audio Layer 3 Additional Information En 101 Appendix Additional Information
WMA decoding forma t ......... V e r . 7 , 7.1, 8, 9, 10, 11 (2ch audio) (Windows Media Player) AAC decoding forma t ............ MPEG-4 AAC (iT unes en- coded only) (.m4a) (V er . 8.0 and earlier) WAV signal format .................. L i n e a r P C M & M S A D P C M (Non-compressed) FM tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz Usable sensitivity ..................... 9 d B f (0.7 õV/75 W , mono, S/N: 30 dB) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 7 2 d B ( I H F - A n e t w o r k ) AM tuner Fr e q u e n c y r a n g e ...................... 5 3 0 k H z t o 1 7 1 0 k H z ( 1 0 kHz) Usable sensitivity ..................... 2 5 õ V ( S / N : 2 0 d B ) Signal-to-noise ratio ............... 6 2 d B ( I H F - A n e t w o r k ) CEA2006 Specifications Po w e r o u t p u t ............................. 1 4 W R M S à4 C h annels (4 W and ⦠1 % THD N) S / N r a t i o ....................................... 9 1 d B A (reference: 1 W into 4 W) Note Specifications and the design are subject to mod- ifications without notice due to improvements. Additional Information En 102 Appendix
A Angle icon ................................................. .26, .39 Aspect ratio .............................................. .39, .98 Audio language ........................................ .26, .38 B Bookmark ........................................................ .25 Brightness ....................................................... .45 C Chapter ............................................................ .98 Code number .................................................. .40 Color ................................................................ .45 Contrast ........................................................... .45 D DivX .................................................................. .98 DivX Certified .................................................. .98 Dolby Digital ............................................. .11, .98 Dolby P ro Logic II .......................................... .98 DTS ............................................................ .11, .98 Dynamic range control ................................. .98 H Hue .................................................................. .45 L Language code chart .................................... .97 Linear PCM (LPCM) ....................................... .99 M Menu language .............................................. .39 MPEG ............................................................... .99 Multi-angle ................................................ .26, .99 Multi-audio ............................. ................... .26, .99 Multi-subtitle ............................................. .26, .99 O Optical digital output/input .......................... .99 P P arental lock ............................................. .40, .99 PBC (playback control) ................................. .22 Playback control (PBC) ............................... .100 R Region number ........................................ .9, .100 S Subtitle language ..................................... .26, .38 T Title ................................................................ .100 TV aspect ................................ ......................... .39 V Video CD ........................................................... .9 W Wide screen mode ......................................... .45 Index En 103
PIONEER CORPORA TION 4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU T OKY O 153-8654, JAP AN PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA ) INC. P .O . Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A. TEL: (800) 421-1404 PIONEER EUROPE NV Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium/Belgique TEL: (0) 3/570.05 .11 PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. L TD. 253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936 TEL: 65-6472-755 5 PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY . L TD. 178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victor ia 3195, Australia TEL: (03) 9586-6300 PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. 300 Allsta te Parkwa y , Markham, Ontar io L3R 0P2, Canada TEL: 1-877-2 83-5901 TEL: 905-479-441 1 PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V . Blvd.Manuel A vila Camacho 138 10 piso Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico , D .F . 11000 TEL: 55-9178-427 0 å  é è¡ 份 æÂ éÂÂå ¬ å¸ 總 å ¬ å¸ ï¼ å°å 帠丠山å 路 亠段 44 èÂÂ13 樠é» 話 ï¼ (02) 2521-3588 å  é é» å @馠港@æÂÂéÂÂå ¬ å¸ 馠港 ä¹ é¾ å° æ² å´ 海港 å 丠ç å æ¥Â丠忠9 æ¨Â901-6 室 é» 話 ï¼ (0852) 2848-6488 Published by Pioneer Cor poration. Copyright é 2008 âÂÂ2009 by Pi oneer Corporation. All rights reser v ed. Printed in Thailand < CRB2972-B/N >U C <KNAZX> <09B00000>